зеркало из https://github.com/mozilla/gecko-dev.git
7491 строка
277 KiB
C++
7491 строка
277 KiB
C++
/* -*- Mode: C++; tab-width: 2; indent-tabs-mode: nil; c-basic-offset: 2 -*- */
|
|
/* vim: set ts=2 sw=2 et tw=80: */
|
|
/* This Source Code Form is subject to the terms of the Mozilla Public
|
|
* License, v. 2.0. If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this
|
|
* file, You can obtain one at http://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/. */
|
|
|
|
#include "mozilla/Likely.h"
|
|
#include "mozilla/MathAlgorithms.h"
|
|
#include "mozilla/IntegerRange.h"
|
|
#include "mozilla/WritingModes.h"
|
|
|
|
#include "nsCOMPtr.h"
|
|
#include "nsTableFrame.h"
|
|
#include "nsRenderingContext.h"
|
|
#include "nsStyleContext.h"
|
|
#include "nsStyleConsts.h"
|
|
#include "nsIContent.h"
|
|
#include "nsCellMap.h"
|
|
#include "nsTableCellFrame.h"
|
|
#include "nsHTMLParts.h"
|
|
#include "nsTableColFrame.h"
|
|
#include "nsTableColGroupFrame.h"
|
|
#include "nsTableRowFrame.h"
|
|
#include "nsTableRowGroupFrame.h"
|
|
#include "nsTableOuterFrame.h"
|
|
#include "nsTablePainter.h"
|
|
|
|
#include "BasicTableLayoutStrategy.h"
|
|
#include "FixedTableLayoutStrategy.h"
|
|
|
|
#include "nsPresContext.h"
|
|
#include "nsContentUtils.h"
|
|
#include "nsCSSRendering.h"
|
|
#include "nsGkAtoms.h"
|
|
#include "nsCSSAnonBoxes.h"
|
|
#include "nsIPresShell.h"
|
|
#include "nsIDOMElement.h"
|
|
#include "nsIDOMHTMLElement.h"
|
|
#include "nsIScriptError.h"
|
|
#include "nsFrameManager.h"
|
|
#include "nsError.h"
|
|
#include "nsAutoPtr.h"
|
|
#include "nsCSSFrameConstructor.h"
|
|
#include "nsStyleSet.h"
|
|
#include "nsDisplayList.h"
|
|
#include "nsIScrollableFrame.h"
|
|
#include "nsCSSProps.h"
|
|
#include "RestyleTracker.h"
|
|
#include <algorithm>
|
|
|
|
using namespace mozilla;
|
|
using namespace mozilla::image;
|
|
using namespace mozilla::layout;
|
|
|
|
/********************************************************************************
|
|
** nsTableReflowState **
|
|
********************************************************************************/
|
|
|
|
struct nsTableReflowState {
|
|
|
|
// the real reflow state
|
|
const nsHTMLReflowState& reflowState;
|
|
|
|
// The table's available size (in reflowState's writing mode)
|
|
LogicalSize availSize;
|
|
|
|
// Stationary inline-offset
|
|
nscoord iCoord;
|
|
|
|
// Running block-offset
|
|
nscoord bCoord;
|
|
|
|
nsTableReflowState(const nsHTMLReflowState& aReflowState,
|
|
const LogicalSize& aAvailSize)
|
|
: reflowState(aReflowState)
|
|
, availSize(aAvailSize)
|
|
{
|
|
MOZ_ASSERT(reflowState.frame->GetType() == nsGkAtoms::tableFrame,
|
|
"nsTableReflowState should only be created for nsTableFrame");
|
|
nsTableFrame* table =
|
|
static_cast<nsTableFrame*>(reflowState.frame->FirstInFlow());
|
|
WritingMode wm = aReflowState.GetWritingMode();
|
|
LogicalMargin borderPadding = table->GetChildAreaOffset(wm, &reflowState);
|
|
|
|
iCoord = borderPadding.IStart(wm) + table->GetColSpacing(-1);
|
|
bCoord = borderPadding.BStart(wm); //cellspacing added during reflow
|
|
|
|
// XXX do we actually need to check for unconstrained inline-size here?
|
|
if (NS_UNCONSTRAINEDSIZE != availSize.ISize(wm)) {
|
|
int32_t colCount = table->GetColCount();
|
|
availSize.ISize(wm) -= borderPadding.IStartEnd(wm) +
|
|
table->GetColSpacing(-1) +
|
|
table->GetColSpacing(colCount);
|
|
availSize.ISize(wm) = std::max(0, availSize.ISize(wm));
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
if (NS_UNCONSTRAINEDSIZE != availSize.BSize(wm)) {
|
|
availSize.BSize(wm) -= borderPadding.BStartEnd(wm) +
|
|
table->GetRowSpacing(-1) +
|
|
table->GetRowSpacing(table->GetRowCount());
|
|
availSize.BSize(wm) = std::max(0, availSize.BSize(wm));
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
/********************************************************************************
|
|
** nsTableFrame **
|
|
********************************************************************************/
|
|
|
|
struct BCPropertyData
|
|
{
|
|
BCPropertyData() : mBStartBorderWidth(0), mIEndBorderWidth(0),
|
|
mBEndBorderWidth(0), mIStartBorderWidth(0),
|
|
mIStartCellBorderWidth(0), mIEndCellBorderWidth(0) {}
|
|
TableArea mDamageArea;
|
|
BCPixelSize mBStartBorderWidth;
|
|
BCPixelSize mIEndBorderWidth;
|
|
BCPixelSize mBEndBorderWidth;
|
|
BCPixelSize mIStartBorderWidth;
|
|
BCPixelSize mIStartCellBorderWidth;
|
|
BCPixelSize mIEndCellBorderWidth;
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
nsStyleContext*
|
|
nsTableFrame::GetParentStyleContext(nsIFrame** aProviderFrame) const
|
|
{
|
|
// Since our parent, the table outer frame, returned this frame, we
|
|
// must return whatever our parent would normally have returned.
|
|
|
|
NS_PRECONDITION(GetParent(), "table constructed without outer table");
|
|
if (!mContent->GetParent() && !StyleContext()->GetPseudo()) {
|
|
// We're the root. We have no style context parent.
|
|
*aProviderFrame = nullptr;
|
|
return nullptr;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
return GetParent()->DoGetParentStyleContext(aProviderFrame);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
nsIAtom*
|
|
nsTableFrame::GetType() const
|
|
{
|
|
return nsGkAtoms::tableFrame;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
nsTableFrame::nsTableFrame(nsStyleContext* aContext)
|
|
: nsContainerFrame(aContext),
|
|
mCellMap(nullptr),
|
|
mTableLayoutStrategy(nullptr)
|
|
{
|
|
memset(&mBits, 0, sizeof(mBits));
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
void
|
|
nsTableFrame::Init(nsIContent* aContent,
|
|
nsContainerFrame* aParent,
|
|
nsIFrame* aPrevInFlow)
|
|
{
|
|
NS_PRECONDITION(!mCellMap, "Init called twice");
|
|
NS_PRECONDITION(!mTableLayoutStrategy, "Init called twice");
|
|
NS_PRECONDITION(!aPrevInFlow ||
|
|
aPrevInFlow->GetType() == nsGkAtoms::tableFrame,
|
|
"prev-in-flow must be of same type");
|
|
|
|
// Let the base class do its processing
|
|
nsContainerFrame::Init(aContent, aParent, aPrevInFlow);
|
|
|
|
// see if border collapse is on, if so set it
|
|
const nsStyleTableBorder* tableStyle = StyleTableBorder();
|
|
bool borderCollapse = (NS_STYLE_BORDER_COLLAPSE == tableStyle->mBorderCollapse);
|
|
SetBorderCollapse(borderCollapse);
|
|
|
|
if (!aPrevInFlow) {
|
|
// If we're the first-in-flow, we manage the cell map & layout strategy that
|
|
// get used by our continuation chain:
|
|
mCellMap = new nsTableCellMap(*this, borderCollapse);
|
|
if (IsAutoLayout()) {
|
|
mTableLayoutStrategy = new BasicTableLayoutStrategy(this);
|
|
} else {
|
|
mTableLayoutStrategy = new FixedTableLayoutStrategy(this);
|
|
}
|
|
} else {
|
|
// Set my isize, because all frames in a table flow are the same isize and
|
|
// code in nsTableOuterFrame depends on this being set.
|
|
WritingMode wm = GetWritingMode();
|
|
SetSize(LogicalSize(wm, aPrevInFlow->ISize(wm), BSize(wm)));
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
nsTableFrame::~nsTableFrame()
|
|
{
|
|
delete mCellMap;
|
|
delete mTableLayoutStrategy;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
void
|
|
nsTableFrame::DestroyFrom(nsIFrame* aDestructRoot)
|
|
{
|
|
mColGroups.DestroyFramesFrom(aDestructRoot);
|
|
nsContainerFrame::DestroyFrom(aDestructRoot);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
// Make sure any views are positioned properly
|
|
void
|
|
nsTableFrame::RePositionViews(nsIFrame* aFrame)
|
|
{
|
|
nsContainerFrame::PositionFrameView(aFrame);
|
|
nsContainerFrame::PositionChildViews(aFrame);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
static bool
|
|
IsRepeatedFrame(nsIFrame* kidFrame)
|
|
{
|
|
return (kidFrame->GetType() == nsGkAtoms::tableRowFrame ||
|
|
kidFrame->GetType() == nsGkAtoms::tableRowGroupFrame) &&
|
|
kidFrame->HasAnyStateBits(NS_REPEATED_ROW_OR_ROWGROUP);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
bool
|
|
nsTableFrame::PageBreakAfter(nsIFrame* aSourceFrame,
|
|
nsIFrame* aNextFrame)
|
|
{
|
|
const nsStyleDisplay* display = aSourceFrame->StyleDisplay();
|
|
nsTableRowGroupFrame* prevRg = do_QueryFrame(aSourceFrame);
|
|
// don't allow a page break after a repeated element ...
|
|
if ((display->mBreakAfter || (prevRg && prevRg->HasInternalBreakAfter())) &&
|
|
!IsRepeatedFrame(aSourceFrame)) {
|
|
return !(aNextFrame && IsRepeatedFrame(aNextFrame)); // or before
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
if (aNextFrame) {
|
|
display = aNextFrame->StyleDisplay();
|
|
// don't allow a page break before a repeated element ...
|
|
nsTableRowGroupFrame* nextRg = do_QueryFrame(aNextFrame);
|
|
if ((display->mBreakBefore ||
|
|
(nextRg && nextRg->HasInternalBreakBefore())) &&
|
|
!IsRepeatedFrame(aNextFrame)) {
|
|
return !IsRepeatedFrame(aSourceFrame); // or after
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
return false;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
typedef nsTArray<nsIFrame*> FrameTArray;
|
|
|
|
/* static */ void
|
|
nsTableFrame::RegisterPositionedTablePart(nsIFrame* aFrame)
|
|
{
|
|
// Supporting relative positioning for table parts other than table cells has
|
|
// the potential to break sites that apply 'position: relative' to those
|
|
// parts, expecting nothing to happen. We warn at the console to make tracking
|
|
// down the issue easy.
|
|
if (!IS_TABLE_CELL(aFrame->GetType())) {
|
|
nsIContent* content = aFrame->GetContent();
|
|
nsPresContext* presContext = aFrame->PresContext();
|
|
if (content && !presContext->HasWarnedAboutPositionedTableParts()) {
|
|
presContext->SetHasWarnedAboutPositionedTableParts();
|
|
nsContentUtils::ReportToConsole(nsIScriptError::warningFlag,
|
|
NS_LITERAL_CSTRING("Layout: Tables"),
|
|
content->OwnerDoc(),
|
|
nsContentUtils::eLAYOUT_PROPERTIES,
|
|
"TablePartRelPosWarning");
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
nsTableFrame* tableFrame = nsTableFrame::GetTableFrame(aFrame);
|
|
MOZ_ASSERT(tableFrame, "Should have a table frame here");
|
|
tableFrame = static_cast<nsTableFrame*>(tableFrame->FirstContinuation());
|
|
|
|
// Retrieve the positioned parts array for this table.
|
|
FrameProperties props = tableFrame->Properties();
|
|
auto positionedParts =
|
|
static_cast<FrameTArray*>(props.Get(PositionedTablePartArray()));
|
|
|
|
// Lazily create the array if it doesn't exist yet.
|
|
if (!positionedParts) {
|
|
positionedParts = new FrameTArray;
|
|
props.Set(PositionedTablePartArray(), positionedParts);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
// Add this frame to the list.
|
|
positionedParts->AppendElement(aFrame);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/* static */ void
|
|
nsTableFrame::UnregisterPositionedTablePart(nsIFrame* aFrame,
|
|
nsIFrame* aDestructRoot)
|
|
{
|
|
// Retrieve the table frame, and ensure that we hit aDestructRoot on the way.
|
|
// If we don't, that means that the table frame will be destroyed, so we don't
|
|
// need to bother with unregistering this frame.
|
|
nsTableFrame* tableFrame = GetTableFramePassingThrough(aDestructRoot, aFrame);
|
|
if (!tableFrame) {
|
|
return;
|
|
}
|
|
tableFrame = static_cast<nsTableFrame*>(tableFrame->FirstContinuation());
|
|
|
|
// Retrieve the positioned parts array for this table.
|
|
FrameProperties props = tableFrame->Properties();
|
|
auto positionedParts =
|
|
static_cast<FrameTArray*>(props.Get(PositionedTablePartArray()));
|
|
|
|
// Remove the frame.
|
|
MOZ_ASSERT(positionedParts && positionedParts->Contains(aFrame),
|
|
"Asked to unregister a positioned table part that wasn't registered");
|
|
if (positionedParts) {
|
|
positionedParts->RemoveElement(aFrame);
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
// XXX this needs to be cleaned up so that the frame constructor breaks out col group
|
|
// frames into a separate child list, bug 343048.
|
|
void
|
|
nsTableFrame::SetInitialChildList(ChildListID aListID,
|
|
nsFrameList& aChildList)
|
|
{
|
|
MOZ_ASSERT(mFrames.IsEmpty() && mColGroups.IsEmpty(),
|
|
"unexpected second call to SetInitialChildList");
|
|
MOZ_ASSERT(aListID == kPrincipalList, "unexpected child list");
|
|
|
|
// XXXbz the below code is an icky cesspit that's only needed in its current
|
|
// form for two reasons:
|
|
// 1) Both rowgroups and column groups come in on the principal child list.
|
|
while (aChildList.NotEmpty()) {
|
|
nsIFrame* childFrame = aChildList.FirstChild();
|
|
aChildList.RemoveFirstChild();
|
|
const nsStyleDisplay* childDisplay = childFrame->StyleDisplay();
|
|
|
|
if (NS_STYLE_DISPLAY_TABLE_COLUMN_GROUP == childDisplay->mDisplay) {
|
|
NS_ASSERTION(nsGkAtoms::tableColGroupFrame == childFrame->GetType(),
|
|
"This is not a colgroup");
|
|
mColGroups.AppendFrame(nullptr, childFrame);
|
|
}
|
|
else { // row groups and unknown frames go on the main list for now
|
|
mFrames.AppendFrame(nullptr, childFrame);
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
// If we have a prev-in-flow, then we're a table that has been split and
|
|
// so don't treat this like an append
|
|
if (!GetPrevInFlow()) {
|
|
// process col groups first so that real cols get constructed before
|
|
// anonymous ones due to cells in rows.
|
|
InsertColGroups(0, mColGroups);
|
|
InsertRowGroups(mFrames);
|
|
// calc collapsing borders
|
|
if (IsBorderCollapse()) {
|
|
SetFullBCDamageArea();
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
void
|
|
nsTableFrame::AttributeChangedFor(nsIFrame* aFrame,
|
|
nsIContent* aContent,
|
|
nsIAtom* aAttribute)
|
|
{
|
|
nsTableCellFrame *cellFrame = do_QueryFrame(aFrame);
|
|
if (cellFrame) {
|
|
if ((nsGkAtoms::rowspan == aAttribute) ||
|
|
(nsGkAtoms::colspan == aAttribute)) {
|
|
nsTableCellMap* cellMap = GetCellMap();
|
|
if (cellMap) {
|
|
// for now just remove the cell from the map and reinsert it
|
|
int32_t rowIndex, colIndex;
|
|
cellFrame->GetRowIndex(rowIndex);
|
|
cellFrame->GetColIndex(colIndex);
|
|
RemoveCell(cellFrame, rowIndex);
|
|
nsAutoTArray<nsTableCellFrame*, 1> cells;
|
|
cells.AppendElement(cellFrame);
|
|
InsertCells(cells, rowIndex, colIndex - 1);
|
|
|
|
// XXX Should this use eStyleChange? It currently doesn't need
|
|
// to, but it might given more optimization.
|
|
PresContext()->PresShell()->
|
|
FrameNeedsReflow(this, nsIPresShell::eTreeChange, NS_FRAME_IS_DIRTY);
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
/* ****** CellMap methods ******* */
|
|
|
|
/* return the effective col count */
|
|
int32_t
|
|
nsTableFrame::GetEffectiveColCount() const
|
|
{
|
|
int32_t colCount = GetColCount();
|
|
if (LayoutStrategy()->GetType() == nsITableLayoutStrategy::Auto) {
|
|
nsTableCellMap* cellMap = GetCellMap();
|
|
if (!cellMap) {
|
|
return 0;
|
|
}
|
|
// don't count cols at the end that don't have originating cells
|
|
for (int32_t colIdx = colCount - 1; colIdx >= 0; colIdx--) {
|
|
if (cellMap->GetNumCellsOriginatingInCol(colIdx) > 0) {
|
|
break;
|
|
}
|
|
colCount--;
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
return colCount;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
int32_t
|
|
nsTableFrame::GetIndexOfLastRealCol()
|
|
{
|
|
int32_t numCols = mColFrames.Length();
|
|
if (numCols > 0) {
|
|
for (int32_t colIdx = numCols - 1; colIdx >= 0; colIdx--) {
|
|
nsTableColFrame* colFrame = GetColFrame(colIdx);
|
|
if (colFrame) {
|
|
if (eColAnonymousCell != colFrame->GetColType()) {
|
|
return colIdx;
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
return -1;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
nsTableColFrame*
|
|
nsTableFrame::GetColFrame(int32_t aColIndex) const
|
|
{
|
|
NS_ASSERTION(!GetPrevInFlow(), "GetColFrame called on next in flow");
|
|
int32_t numCols = mColFrames.Length();
|
|
if ((aColIndex >= 0) && (aColIndex < numCols)) {
|
|
return mColFrames.ElementAt(aColIndex);
|
|
}
|
|
else {
|
|
NS_ERROR("invalid col index");
|
|
return nullptr;
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
int32_t
|
|
nsTableFrame::GetEffectiveRowSpan(int32_t aRowIndex,
|
|
const nsTableCellFrame& aCell) const
|
|
{
|
|
nsTableCellMap* cellMap = GetCellMap();
|
|
NS_PRECONDITION (nullptr != cellMap, "bad call, cellMap not yet allocated.");
|
|
|
|
int32_t colIndex;
|
|
aCell.GetColIndex(colIndex);
|
|
return cellMap->GetEffectiveRowSpan(aRowIndex, colIndex);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
int32_t
|
|
nsTableFrame::GetEffectiveRowSpan(const nsTableCellFrame& aCell,
|
|
nsCellMap* aCellMap)
|
|
{
|
|
nsTableCellMap* tableCellMap = GetCellMap(); if (!tableCellMap) ABORT1(1);
|
|
|
|
int32_t colIndex, rowIndex;
|
|
aCell.GetColIndex(colIndex);
|
|
aCell.GetRowIndex(rowIndex);
|
|
|
|
if (aCellMap)
|
|
return aCellMap->GetRowSpan(rowIndex, colIndex, true);
|
|
else
|
|
return tableCellMap->GetEffectiveRowSpan(rowIndex, colIndex);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
int32_t
|
|
nsTableFrame::GetEffectiveColSpan(const nsTableCellFrame& aCell,
|
|
nsCellMap* aCellMap) const
|
|
{
|
|
nsTableCellMap* tableCellMap = GetCellMap(); if (!tableCellMap) ABORT1(1);
|
|
|
|
int32_t colIndex, rowIndex;
|
|
aCell.GetColIndex(colIndex);
|
|
aCell.GetRowIndex(rowIndex);
|
|
bool ignore;
|
|
|
|
if (aCellMap)
|
|
return aCellMap->GetEffectiveColSpan(*tableCellMap, rowIndex, colIndex, ignore);
|
|
else
|
|
return tableCellMap->GetEffectiveColSpan(rowIndex, colIndex);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
bool
|
|
nsTableFrame::HasMoreThanOneCell(int32_t aRowIndex) const
|
|
{
|
|
nsTableCellMap* tableCellMap = GetCellMap(); if (!tableCellMap) ABORT1(1);
|
|
return tableCellMap->HasMoreThanOneCell(aRowIndex);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
void
|
|
nsTableFrame::AdjustRowIndices(int32_t aRowIndex,
|
|
int32_t aAdjustment)
|
|
{
|
|
// Iterate over the row groups and adjust the row indices of all rows
|
|
// whose index is >= aRowIndex.
|
|
RowGroupArray rowGroups;
|
|
OrderRowGroups(rowGroups);
|
|
|
|
for (uint32_t rgIdx = 0; rgIdx < rowGroups.Length(); rgIdx++) {
|
|
rowGroups[rgIdx]->AdjustRowIndices(aRowIndex, aAdjustment);
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
void
|
|
nsTableFrame::ResetRowIndices(const nsFrameList::Slice& aRowGroupsToExclude)
|
|
{
|
|
// Iterate over the row groups and adjust the row indices of all rows
|
|
// omit the rowgroups that will be inserted later
|
|
RowGroupArray rowGroups;
|
|
OrderRowGroups(rowGroups);
|
|
|
|
int32_t rowIndex = 0;
|
|
nsTHashtable<nsPtrHashKey<nsTableRowGroupFrame> > excludeRowGroups;
|
|
nsFrameList::Enumerator excludeRowGroupsEnumerator(aRowGroupsToExclude);
|
|
while (!excludeRowGroupsEnumerator.AtEnd()) {
|
|
excludeRowGroups.PutEntry(static_cast<nsTableRowGroupFrame*>(excludeRowGroupsEnumerator.get()));
|
|
excludeRowGroupsEnumerator.Next();
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
for (uint32_t rgIdx = 0; rgIdx < rowGroups.Length(); rgIdx++) {
|
|
nsTableRowGroupFrame* rgFrame = rowGroups[rgIdx];
|
|
if (!excludeRowGroups.GetEntry(rgFrame)) {
|
|
const nsFrameList& rowFrames = rgFrame->PrincipalChildList();
|
|
for (nsFrameList::Enumerator rows(rowFrames); !rows.AtEnd(); rows.Next()) {
|
|
if (NS_STYLE_DISPLAY_TABLE_ROW==rows.get()->StyleDisplay()->mDisplay) {
|
|
((nsTableRowFrame *)rows.get())->SetRowIndex(rowIndex);
|
|
rowIndex++;
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
void
|
|
nsTableFrame::InsertColGroups(int32_t aStartColIndex,
|
|
const nsFrameList::Slice& aColGroups)
|
|
{
|
|
int32_t colIndex = aStartColIndex;
|
|
nsFrameList::Enumerator colGroups(aColGroups);
|
|
for (; !colGroups.AtEnd(); colGroups.Next()) {
|
|
MOZ_ASSERT(colGroups.get()->GetType() == nsGkAtoms::tableColGroupFrame);
|
|
nsTableColGroupFrame* cgFrame =
|
|
static_cast<nsTableColGroupFrame*>(colGroups.get());
|
|
cgFrame->SetStartColumnIndex(colIndex);
|
|
// XXXbz this sucks. AddColsToTable will actually remove colgroups from
|
|
// the list we're traversing! Need to fix things here. :( I guess this is
|
|
// why the old code used pointer-to-last-frame as opposed to
|
|
// pointer-to-frame-after-last....
|
|
|
|
// How about dealing with this by storing a const reference to the
|
|
// mNextSibling of the framelist's last frame, instead of storing a pointer
|
|
// to the first-after-next frame? Will involve making nsFrameList friend
|
|
// of nsIFrame, but it's time for that anyway.
|
|
cgFrame->AddColsToTable(colIndex, false,
|
|
colGroups.get()->PrincipalChildList());
|
|
int32_t numCols = cgFrame->GetColCount();
|
|
colIndex += numCols;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
nsFrameList::Enumerator remainingColgroups = colGroups.GetUnlimitedEnumerator();
|
|
if (!remainingColgroups.AtEnd()) {
|
|
nsTableColGroupFrame::ResetColIndices(
|
|
static_cast<nsTableColGroupFrame*>(remainingColgroups.get()), colIndex);
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
void
|
|
nsTableFrame::InsertCol(nsTableColFrame& aColFrame,
|
|
int32_t aColIndex)
|
|
{
|
|
mColFrames.InsertElementAt(aColIndex, &aColFrame);
|
|
nsTableColType insertedColType = aColFrame.GetColType();
|
|
int32_t numCacheCols = mColFrames.Length();
|
|
nsTableCellMap* cellMap = GetCellMap();
|
|
if (cellMap) {
|
|
int32_t numMapCols = cellMap->GetColCount();
|
|
if (numCacheCols > numMapCols) {
|
|
bool removedFromCache = false;
|
|
if (eColAnonymousCell != insertedColType) {
|
|
nsTableColFrame* lastCol = mColFrames.ElementAt(numCacheCols - 1);
|
|
if (lastCol) {
|
|
nsTableColType lastColType = lastCol->GetColType();
|
|
if (eColAnonymousCell == lastColType) {
|
|
// remove the col from the cache
|
|
mColFrames.RemoveElementAt(numCacheCols - 1);
|
|
// remove the col from the eColGroupAnonymousCell col group
|
|
nsTableColGroupFrame* lastColGroup = (nsTableColGroupFrame *)mColGroups.LastChild();
|
|
if (lastColGroup) {
|
|
lastColGroup->RemoveChild(*lastCol, false);
|
|
|
|
// remove the col group if it is empty
|
|
if (lastColGroup->GetColCount() <= 0) {
|
|
mColGroups.DestroyFrame((nsIFrame*)lastColGroup);
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
removedFromCache = true;
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
if (!removedFromCache) {
|
|
cellMap->AddColsAtEnd(1);
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
// for now, just bail and recalc all of the collapsing borders
|
|
if (IsBorderCollapse()) {
|
|
TableArea damageArea(aColIndex, 0, 1, GetRowCount());
|
|
AddBCDamageArea(damageArea);
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
void
|
|
nsTableFrame::RemoveCol(nsTableColGroupFrame* aColGroupFrame,
|
|
int32_t aColIndex,
|
|
bool aRemoveFromCache,
|
|
bool aRemoveFromCellMap)
|
|
{
|
|
if (aRemoveFromCache) {
|
|
mColFrames.RemoveElementAt(aColIndex);
|
|
}
|
|
if (aRemoveFromCellMap) {
|
|
nsTableCellMap* cellMap = GetCellMap();
|
|
if (cellMap) {
|
|
AppendAnonymousColFrames(1);
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
// for now, just bail and recalc all of the collapsing borders
|
|
if (IsBorderCollapse()) {
|
|
TableArea damageArea(0, 0, GetColCount(), GetRowCount());
|
|
AddBCDamageArea(damageArea);
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/** Get the cell map for this table frame. It is not always mCellMap.
|
|
* Only the first-in-flow has a legit cell map.
|
|
*/
|
|
nsTableCellMap*
|
|
nsTableFrame::GetCellMap() const
|
|
{
|
|
return static_cast<nsTableFrame*>(FirstInFlow())->mCellMap;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
// XXX this needs to be moved to nsCSSFrameConstructor
|
|
nsTableColGroupFrame*
|
|
nsTableFrame::CreateAnonymousColGroupFrame(nsTableColGroupType aColGroupType)
|
|
{
|
|
nsIContent* colGroupContent = GetContent();
|
|
nsPresContext* presContext = PresContext();
|
|
nsIPresShell *shell = presContext->PresShell();
|
|
|
|
RefPtr<nsStyleContext> colGroupStyle;
|
|
colGroupStyle = shell->StyleSet()->
|
|
ResolveAnonymousBoxStyle(nsCSSAnonBoxes::tableColGroup, mStyleContext);
|
|
// Create a col group frame
|
|
nsIFrame* newFrame = NS_NewTableColGroupFrame(shell, colGroupStyle);
|
|
((nsTableColGroupFrame *)newFrame)->SetColType(aColGroupType);
|
|
newFrame->Init(colGroupContent, this, nullptr);
|
|
return (nsTableColGroupFrame *)newFrame;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
void
|
|
nsTableFrame::AppendAnonymousColFrames(int32_t aNumColsToAdd)
|
|
{
|
|
// get the last col group frame
|
|
nsTableColGroupFrame* colGroupFrame =
|
|
static_cast<nsTableColGroupFrame*>(mColGroups.LastChild());
|
|
|
|
if (!colGroupFrame ||
|
|
(colGroupFrame->GetColType() != eColGroupAnonymousCell)) {
|
|
int32_t colIndex = (colGroupFrame) ?
|
|
colGroupFrame->GetStartColumnIndex() +
|
|
colGroupFrame->GetColCount() : 0;
|
|
colGroupFrame = CreateAnonymousColGroupFrame(eColGroupAnonymousCell);
|
|
if (!colGroupFrame) {
|
|
return;
|
|
}
|
|
// add the new frame to the child list
|
|
mColGroups.AppendFrame(this, colGroupFrame);
|
|
colGroupFrame->SetStartColumnIndex(colIndex);
|
|
}
|
|
AppendAnonymousColFrames(colGroupFrame, aNumColsToAdd, eColAnonymousCell,
|
|
true);
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
// XXX this needs to be moved to nsCSSFrameConstructor
|
|
// Right now it only creates the col frames at the end
|
|
void
|
|
nsTableFrame::AppendAnonymousColFrames(nsTableColGroupFrame* aColGroupFrame,
|
|
int32_t aNumColsToAdd,
|
|
nsTableColType aColType,
|
|
bool aAddToTable)
|
|
{
|
|
NS_PRECONDITION(aColGroupFrame, "null frame");
|
|
NS_PRECONDITION(aColType != eColAnonymousCol, "Shouldn't happen");
|
|
|
|
nsIPresShell *shell = PresContext()->PresShell();
|
|
|
|
// Get the last col frame
|
|
nsFrameList newColFrames;
|
|
|
|
int32_t startIndex = mColFrames.Length();
|
|
int32_t lastIndex = startIndex + aNumColsToAdd - 1;
|
|
|
|
for (int32_t childX = startIndex; childX <= lastIndex; childX++) {
|
|
nsIContent* iContent;
|
|
RefPtr<nsStyleContext> styleContext;
|
|
nsStyleContext* parentStyleContext;
|
|
|
|
// all anonymous cols that we create here use a pseudo style context of the
|
|
// col group
|
|
iContent = aColGroupFrame->GetContent();
|
|
parentStyleContext = aColGroupFrame->StyleContext();
|
|
styleContext = shell->StyleSet()->
|
|
ResolveAnonymousBoxStyle(nsCSSAnonBoxes::tableCol, parentStyleContext);
|
|
// ASSERTION to check for bug 54454 sneaking back in...
|
|
NS_ASSERTION(iContent, "null content in CreateAnonymousColFrames");
|
|
|
|
// create the new col frame
|
|
nsIFrame* colFrame = NS_NewTableColFrame(shell, styleContext);
|
|
((nsTableColFrame *) colFrame)->SetColType(aColType);
|
|
colFrame->Init(iContent, aColGroupFrame, nullptr);
|
|
|
|
newColFrames.AppendFrame(nullptr, colFrame);
|
|
}
|
|
nsFrameList& cols = aColGroupFrame->GetWritableChildList();
|
|
nsIFrame* oldLastCol = cols.LastChild();
|
|
const nsFrameList::Slice& newCols =
|
|
cols.InsertFrames(nullptr, oldLastCol, newColFrames);
|
|
if (aAddToTable) {
|
|
// get the starting col index in the cache
|
|
int32_t startColIndex;
|
|
if (oldLastCol) {
|
|
startColIndex =
|
|
static_cast<nsTableColFrame*>(oldLastCol)->GetColIndex() + 1;
|
|
} else {
|
|
startColIndex = aColGroupFrame->GetStartColumnIndex();
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
aColGroupFrame->AddColsToTable(startColIndex, true, newCols);
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
void
|
|
nsTableFrame::MatchCellMapToColCache(nsTableCellMap* aCellMap)
|
|
{
|
|
int32_t numColsInMap = GetColCount();
|
|
int32_t numColsInCache = mColFrames.Length();
|
|
int32_t numColsToAdd = numColsInMap - numColsInCache;
|
|
if (numColsToAdd > 0) {
|
|
// this sets the child list, updates the col cache and cell map
|
|
AppendAnonymousColFrames(numColsToAdd);
|
|
}
|
|
if (numColsToAdd < 0) {
|
|
int32_t numColsNotRemoved = DestroyAnonymousColFrames(-numColsToAdd);
|
|
// if the cell map has fewer cols than the cache, correct it
|
|
if (numColsNotRemoved > 0) {
|
|
aCellMap->AddColsAtEnd(numColsNotRemoved);
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
if (numColsToAdd && HasZeroColSpans()) {
|
|
SetNeedColSpanExpansion(true);
|
|
}
|
|
if (NeedColSpanExpansion()) {
|
|
// This flag can be set in two ways -- either by changing
|
|
// the number of columns (that happens in the block above),
|
|
// or by adding a cell with colspan="0" to the cellmap. To
|
|
// handle the latter case we need to explicitly check the
|
|
// flag here -- it may be set even if the number of columns
|
|
// did not change.
|
|
//
|
|
// @see nsCellMap::AppendCell
|
|
|
|
aCellMap->ExpandZeroColSpans();
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
void
|
|
nsTableFrame::DidResizeColumns()
|
|
{
|
|
NS_PRECONDITION(!GetPrevInFlow(),
|
|
"should only be called on first-in-flow");
|
|
if (mBits.mResizedColumns)
|
|
return; // already marked
|
|
|
|
for (nsTableFrame *f = this; f;
|
|
f = static_cast<nsTableFrame*>(f->GetNextInFlow()))
|
|
f->mBits.mResizedColumns = true;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
void
|
|
nsTableFrame::AppendCell(nsTableCellFrame& aCellFrame,
|
|
int32_t aRowIndex)
|
|
{
|
|
nsTableCellMap* cellMap = GetCellMap();
|
|
if (cellMap) {
|
|
TableArea damageArea(0, 0, 0, 0);
|
|
cellMap->AppendCell(aCellFrame, aRowIndex, true, damageArea);
|
|
MatchCellMapToColCache(cellMap);
|
|
if (IsBorderCollapse()) {
|
|
AddBCDamageArea(damageArea);
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
void
|
|
nsTableFrame::InsertCells(nsTArray<nsTableCellFrame*>& aCellFrames,
|
|
int32_t aRowIndex,
|
|
int32_t aColIndexBefore)
|
|
{
|
|
nsTableCellMap* cellMap = GetCellMap();
|
|
if (cellMap) {
|
|
TableArea damageArea(0, 0, 0, 0);
|
|
cellMap->InsertCells(aCellFrames, aRowIndex, aColIndexBefore, damageArea);
|
|
MatchCellMapToColCache(cellMap);
|
|
if (IsBorderCollapse()) {
|
|
AddBCDamageArea(damageArea);
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
// this removes the frames from the col group and table, but not the cell map
|
|
int32_t
|
|
nsTableFrame::DestroyAnonymousColFrames(int32_t aNumFrames)
|
|
{
|
|
// only remove cols that are of type eTypeAnonymous cell (they are at the end)
|
|
int32_t endIndex = mColFrames.Length() - 1;
|
|
int32_t startIndex = (endIndex - aNumFrames) + 1;
|
|
int32_t numColsRemoved = 0;
|
|
for (int32_t colIdx = endIndex; colIdx >= startIndex; colIdx--) {
|
|
nsTableColFrame* colFrame = GetColFrame(colIdx);
|
|
if (colFrame && (eColAnonymousCell == colFrame->GetColType())) {
|
|
nsTableColGroupFrame* cgFrame =
|
|
static_cast<nsTableColGroupFrame*>(colFrame->GetParent());
|
|
// remove the frame from the colgroup
|
|
cgFrame->RemoveChild(*colFrame, false);
|
|
// remove the frame from the cache, but not the cell map
|
|
RemoveCol(nullptr, colIdx, true, false);
|
|
numColsRemoved++;
|
|
}
|
|
else {
|
|
break;
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
return (aNumFrames - numColsRemoved);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
void
|
|
nsTableFrame::RemoveCell(nsTableCellFrame* aCellFrame,
|
|
int32_t aRowIndex)
|
|
{
|
|
nsTableCellMap* cellMap = GetCellMap();
|
|
if (cellMap) {
|
|
TableArea damageArea(0, 0, 0, 0);
|
|
cellMap->RemoveCell(aCellFrame, aRowIndex, damageArea);
|
|
MatchCellMapToColCache(cellMap);
|
|
if (IsBorderCollapse()) {
|
|
AddBCDamageArea(damageArea);
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
int32_t
|
|
nsTableFrame::GetStartRowIndex(nsTableRowGroupFrame* aRowGroupFrame)
|
|
{
|
|
RowGroupArray orderedRowGroups;
|
|
OrderRowGroups(orderedRowGroups);
|
|
|
|
int32_t rowIndex = 0;
|
|
for (uint32_t rgIndex = 0; rgIndex < orderedRowGroups.Length(); rgIndex++) {
|
|
nsTableRowGroupFrame* rgFrame = orderedRowGroups[rgIndex];
|
|
if (rgFrame == aRowGroupFrame) {
|
|
break;
|
|
}
|
|
int32_t numRows = rgFrame->GetRowCount();
|
|
rowIndex += numRows;
|
|
}
|
|
return rowIndex;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
// this cannot extend beyond a single row group
|
|
void
|
|
nsTableFrame::AppendRows(nsTableRowGroupFrame* aRowGroupFrame,
|
|
int32_t aRowIndex,
|
|
nsTArray<nsTableRowFrame*>& aRowFrames)
|
|
{
|
|
nsTableCellMap* cellMap = GetCellMap();
|
|
if (cellMap) {
|
|
int32_t absRowIndex = GetStartRowIndex(aRowGroupFrame) + aRowIndex;
|
|
InsertRows(aRowGroupFrame, aRowFrames, absRowIndex, true);
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
// this cannot extend beyond a single row group
|
|
int32_t
|
|
nsTableFrame::InsertRows(nsTableRowGroupFrame* aRowGroupFrame,
|
|
nsTArray<nsTableRowFrame*>& aRowFrames,
|
|
int32_t aRowIndex,
|
|
bool aConsiderSpans)
|
|
{
|
|
#ifdef DEBUG_TABLE_CELLMAP
|
|
printf("=== insertRowsBefore firstRow=%d \n", aRowIndex);
|
|
Dump(true, false, true);
|
|
#endif
|
|
|
|
int32_t numColsToAdd = 0;
|
|
nsTableCellMap* cellMap = GetCellMap();
|
|
if (cellMap) {
|
|
TableArea damageArea(0, 0, 0, 0);
|
|
int32_t origNumRows = cellMap->GetRowCount();
|
|
int32_t numNewRows = aRowFrames.Length();
|
|
cellMap->InsertRows(aRowGroupFrame, aRowFrames, aRowIndex, aConsiderSpans, damageArea);
|
|
MatchCellMapToColCache(cellMap);
|
|
if (aRowIndex < origNumRows) {
|
|
AdjustRowIndices(aRowIndex, numNewRows);
|
|
}
|
|
// assign the correct row indices to the new rows. If they were adjusted above
|
|
// it may not have been done correctly because each row is constructed with index 0
|
|
for (int32_t rowB = 0; rowB < numNewRows; rowB++) {
|
|
nsTableRowFrame* rowFrame = aRowFrames.ElementAt(rowB);
|
|
rowFrame->SetRowIndex(aRowIndex + rowB);
|
|
}
|
|
if (IsBorderCollapse()) {
|
|
AddBCDamageArea(damageArea);
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
#ifdef DEBUG_TABLE_CELLMAP
|
|
printf("=== insertRowsAfter \n");
|
|
Dump(true, false, true);
|
|
#endif
|
|
|
|
return numColsToAdd;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
// this cannot extend beyond a single row group
|
|
void
|
|
nsTableFrame::RemoveRows(nsTableRowFrame& aFirstRowFrame,
|
|
int32_t aNumRowsToRemove,
|
|
bool aConsiderSpans)
|
|
{
|
|
#ifdef TBD_OPTIMIZATION
|
|
// decide if we need to rebalance. we have to do this here because the row group
|
|
// cannot do it when it gets the dirty reflow corresponding to the frame being destroyed
|
|
bool stopTelling = false;
|
|
for (nsIFrame* kidFrame = aFirstFrame.FirstChild(); (kidFrame && !stopAsking);
|
|
kidFrame = kidFrame->GetNextSibling()) {
|
|
nsTableCellFrame *cellFrame = do_QueryFrame(kidFrame);
|
|
if (cellFrame) {
|
|
stopTelling = tableFrame->CellChangedWidth(*cellFrame, cellFrame->GetPass1MaxElementWidth(),
|
|
cellFrame->GetMaximumWidth(), true);
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
// XXX need to consider what happens if there are cells that have rowspans
|
|
// into the deleted row. Need to consider moving rows if a rebalance doesn't happen
|
|
#endif
|
|
|
|
int32_t firstRowIndex = aFirstRowFrame.GetRowIndex();
|
|
#ifdef DEBUG_TABLE_CELLMAP
|
|
printf("=== removeRowsBefore firstRow=%d numRows=%d\n", firstRowIndex, aNumRowsToRemove);
|
|
Dump(true, false, true);
|
|
#endif
|
|
nsTableCellMap* cellMap = GetCellMap();
|
|
if (cellMap) {
|
|
TableArea damageArea(0, 0, 0, 0);
|
|
cellMap->RemoveRows(firstRowIndex, aNumRowsToRemove, aConsiderSpans, damageArea);
|
|
MatchCellMapToColCache(cellMap);
|
|
if (IsBorderCollapse()) {
|
|
AddBCDamageArea(damageArea);
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
AdjustRowIndices(firstRowIndex, -aNumRowsToRemove);
|
|
#ifdef DEBUG_TABLE_CELLMAP
|
|
printf("=== removeRowsAfter\n");
|
|
Dump(true, true, true);
|
|
#endif
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
// collect the rows ancestors of aFrame
|
|
int32_t
|
|
nsTableFrame::CollectRows(nsIFrame* aFrame,
|
|
nsTArray<nsTableRowFrame*>& aCollection)
|
|
{
|
|
NS_PRECONDITION(aFrame, "null frame");
|
|
int32_t numRows = 0;
|
|
nsIFrame* childFrame = aFrame->GetFirstPrincipalChild();
|
|
while (childFrame) {
|
|
aCollection.AppendElement(static_cast<nsTableRowFrame*>(childFrame));
|
|
numRows++;
|
|
childFrame = childFrame->GetNextSibling();
|
|
}
|
|
return numRows;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
void
|
|
nsTableFrame::InsertRowGroups(const nsFrameList::Slice& aRowGroups)
|
|
{
|
|
#ifdef DEBUG_TABLE_CELLMAP
|
|
printf("=== insertRowGroupsBefore\n");
|
|
Dump(true, false, true);
|
|
#endif
|
|
nsTableCellMap* cellMap = GetCellMap();
|
|
if (cellMap) {
|
|
RowGroupArray orderedRowGroups;
|
|
OrderRowGroups(orderedRowGroups);
|
|
|
|
nsAutoTArray<nsTableRowFrame*, 8> rows;
|
|
// Loop over the rowgroups and check if some of them are new, if they are
|
|
// insert cellmaps in the order that is predefined by OrderRowGroups,
|
|
// XXXbz this code is O(N*M) where N is number of new rowgroups
|
|
// and M is number of rowgroups we have!
|
|
uint32_t rgIndex;
|
|
for (rgIndex = 0; rgIndex < orderedRowGroups.Length(); rgIndex++) {
|
|
for (nsFrameList::Enumerator rowgroups(aRowGroups); !rowgroups.AtEnd();
|
|
rowgroups.Next()) {
|
|
if (orderedRowGroups[rgIndex] == rowgroups.get()) {
|
|
nsTableRowGroupFrame* priorRG =
|
|
(0 == rgIndex) ? nullptr : orderedRowGroups[rgIndex - 1];
|
|
// create and add the cell map for the row group
|
|
cellMap->InsertGroupCellMap(orderedRowGroups[rgIndex], priorRG);
|
|
|
|
break;
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
cellMap->Synchronize(this);
|
|
ResetRowIndices(aRowGroups);
|
|
|
|
//now that the cellmaps are reordered too insert the rows
|
|
for (rgIndex = 0; rgIndex < orderedRowGroups.Length(); rgIndex++) {
|
|
for (nsFrameList::Enumerator rowgroups(aRowGroups); !rowgroups.AtEnd();
|
|
rowgroups.Next()) {
|
|
if (orderedRowGroups[rgIndex] == rowgroups.get()) {
|
|
nsTableRowGroupFrame* priorRG =
|
|
(0 == rgIndex) ? nullptr : orderedRowGroups[rgIndex - 1];
|
|
// collect the new row frames in an array and add them to the table
|
|
int32_t numRows = CollectRows(rowgroups.get(), rows);
|
|
if (numRows > 0) {
|
|
int32_t rowIndex = 0;
|
|
if (priorRG) {
|
|
int32_t priorNumRows = priorRG->GetRowCount();
|
|
rowIndex = priorRG->GetStartRowIndex() + priorNumRows;
|
|
}
|
|
InsertRows(orderedRowGroups[rgIndex], rows, rowIndex, true);
|
|
rows.Clear();
|
|
}
|
|
break;
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
#ifdef DEBUG_TABLE_CELLMAP
|
|
printf("=== insertRowGroupsAfter\n");
|
|
Dump(true, true, true);
|
|
#endif
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
|
|
// Child frame enumeration
|
|
|
|
const nsFrameList&
|
|
nsTableFrame::GetChildList(ChildListID aListID) const
|
|
{
|
|
if (aListID == kColGroupList) {
|
|
return mColGroups;
|
|
}
|
|
return nsContainerFrame::GetChildList(aListID);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
void
|
|
nsTableFrame::GetChildLists(nsTArray<ChildList>* aLists) const
|
|
{
|
|
nsContainerFrame::GetChildLists(aLists);
|
|
mColGroups.AppendIfNonempty(aLists, kColGroupList);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
nsRect
|
|
nsDisplayTableItem::GetBounds(nsDisplayListBuilder* aBuilder, bool* aSnap) {
|
|
*aSnap = false;
|
|
return mFrame->GetVisualOverflowRectRelativeToSelf() + ToReferenceFrame();
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
void
|
|
nsDisplayTableItem::UpdateForFrameBackground(nsIFrame* aFrame)
|
|
{
|
|
nsStyleContext *bgSC;
|
|
if (!nsCSSRendering::FindBackground(aFrame, &bgSC))
|
|
return;
|
|
if (!bgSC->StyleBackground()->HasFixedBackground())
|
|
return;
|
|
|
|
mPartHasFixedBackground = true;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
nsDisplayItemGeometry*
|
|
nsDisplayTableItem::AllocateGeometry(nsDisplayListBuilder* aBuilder)
|
|
{
|
|
return new nsDisplayTableItemGeometry(this, aBuilder,
|
|
mFrame->GetOffsetTo(mFrame->PresContext()->PresShell()->GetRootFrame()));
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
void
|
|
nsDisplayTableItem::ComputeInvalidationRegion(nsDisplayListBuilder* aBuilder,
|
|
const nsDisplayItemGeometry* aGeometry,
|
|
nsRegion *aInvalidRegion)
|
|
{
|
|
auto geometry =
|
|
static_cast<const nsDisplayTableItemGeometry*>(aGeometry);
|
|
|
|
bool invalidateForAttachmentFixed = false;
|
|
if (mPartHasFixedBackground) {
|
|
nsPoint frameOffsetToViewport = mFrame->GetOffsetTo(
|
|
mFrame->PresContext()->PresShell()->GetRootFrame());
|
|
invalidateForAttachmentFixed =
|
|
frameOffsetToViewport != geometry->mFrameOffsetToViewport;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
if (invalidateForAttachmentFixed ||
|
|
(aBuilder->ShouldSyncDecodeImages() &&
|
|
geometry->ShouldInvalidateToSyncDecodeImages())) {
|
|
bool snap;
|
|
aInvalidRegion->Or(*aInvalidRegion, GetBounds(aBuilder, &snap));
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
nsDisplayItem::ComputeInvalidationRegion(aBuilder, aGeometry, aInvalidRegion);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
class nsDisplayTableBorderBackground : public nsDisplayTableItem {
|
|
public:
|
|
nsDisplayTableBorderBackground(nsDisplayListBuilder* aBuilder,
|
|
nsTableFrame* aFrame) :
|
|
nsDisplayTableItem(aBuilder, aFrame) {
|
|
MOZ_COUNT_CTOR(nsDisplayTableBorderBackground);
|
|
}
|
|
#ifdef NS_BUILD_REFCNT_LOGGING
|
|
virtual ~nsDisplayTableBorderBackground() {
|
|
MOZ_COUNT_DTOR(nsDisplayTableBorderBackground);
|
|
}
|
|
#endif
|
|
|
|
virtual void Paint(nsDisplayListBuilder* aBuilder,
|
|
nsRenderingContext* aCtx) override;
|
|
NS_DISPLAY_DECL_NAME("TableBorderBackground", TYPE_TABLE_BORDER_BACKGROUND)
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
#ifdef DEBUG
|
|
static bool
|
|
IsFrameAllowedInTable(nsIAtom* aType)
|
|
{
|
|
return IS_TABLE_CELL(aType) ||
|
|
nsGkAtoms::tableRowFrame == aType ||
|
|
nsGkAtoms::tableRowGroupFrame == aType ||
|
|
nsGkAtoms::scrollFrame == aType ||
|
|
nsGkAtoms::tableFrame == aType ||
|
|
nsGkAtoms::tableColFrame == aType ||
|
|
nsGkAtoms::tableColGroupFrame == aType;
|
|
}
|
|
#endif
|
|
|
|
void
|
|
nsDisplayTableBorderBackground::Paint(nsDisplayListBuilder* aBuilder,
|
|
nsRenderingContext* aCtx)
|
|
{
|
|
DrawResult result = static_cast<nsTableFrame*>(mFrame)->
|
|
PaintTableBorderBackground(*aCtx, mVisibleRect,
|
|
ToReferenceFrame(),
|
|
aBuilder->GetBackgroundPaintFlags());
|
|
|
|
nsDisplayTableItemGeometry::UpdateDrawResult(this, result);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
static int32_t
|
|
GetTablePartRank(nsDisplayItem* aItem)
|
|
{
|
|
nsIAtom* type = aItem->Frame()->GetType();
|
|
if (type == nsGkAtoms::tableFrame)
|
|
return 0;
|
|
if (type == nsGkAtoms::tableRowGroupFrame)
|
|
return 1;
|
|
if (type == nsGkAtoms::tableRowFrame)
|
|
return 2;
|
|
return 3;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
static bool CompareByTablePartRank(nsDisplayItem* aItem1, nsDisplayItem* aItem2,
|
|
void* aClosure)
|
|
{
|
|
return GetTablePartRank(aItem1) <= GetTablePartRank(aItem2);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/* static */ void
|
|
nsTableFrame::GenericTraversal(nsDisplayListBuilder* aBuilder, nsFrame* aFrame,
|
|
const nsRect& aDirtyRect, const nsDisplayListSet& aLists)
|
|
{
|
|
// This is similar to what nsContainerFrame::BuildDisplayListForNonBlockChildren
|
|
// does, except that we allow the children's background and borders to go
|
|
// in our BorderBackground list. This doesn't really affect background
|
|
// painting --- the children won't actually draw their own backgrounds
|
|
// because the nsTableFrame already drew them, unless a child has its own
|
|
// stacking context, in which case the child won't use its passed-in
|
|
// BorderBackground list anyway. It does affect cell borders though; this
|
|
// lets us get cell borders into the nsTableFrame's BorderBackground list.
|
|
nsIFrame* kid = aFrame->GetFirstPrincipalChild();
|
|
while (kid) {
|
|
aFrame->BuildDisplayListForChild(aBuilder, kid, aDirtyRect, aLists);
|
|
kid = kid->GetNextSibling();
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/* static */ void
|
|
nsTableFrame::DisplayGenericTablePart(nsDisplayListBuilder* aBuilder,
|
|
nsFrame* aFrame,
|
|
const nsRect& aDirtyRect,
|
|
const nsDisplayListSet& aLists,
|
|
nsDisplayTableItem* aDisplayItem,
|
|
DisplayGenericTablePartTraversal aTraversal)
|
|
{
|
|
nsDisplayList eventsBorderBackground;
|
|
// If we need to sort the event backgrounds, then we'll put descendants'
|
|
// display items into their own set of lists.
|
|
bool sortEventBackgrounds = aDisplayItem && aBuilder->IsForEventDelivery();
|
|
nsDisplayListCollection separatedCollection;
|
|
const nsDisplayListSet* lists = sortEventBackgrounds ? &separatedCollection : &aLists;
|
|
|
|
nsAutoPushCurrentTableItem pushTableItem;
|
|
if (aDisplayItem) {
|
|
pushTableItem.Push(aBuilder, aDisplayItem);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
if (aFrame->IsVisibleForPainting(aBuilder)) {
|
|
nsDisplayTableItem* currentItem = aBuilder->GetCurrentTableItem();
|
|
// currentItem may be null, when none of the table parts have a
|
|
// background or border
|
|
if (currentItem) {
|
|
currentItem->UpdateForFrameBackground(aFrame);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
// Paint the outset box-shadows for the table frames
|
|
bool hasBoxShadow = aFrame->StyleBorder()->mBoxShadow != nullptr;
|
|
if (hasBoxShadow) {
|
|
lists->BorderBackground()->AppendNewToTop(
|
|
new (aBuilder) nsDisplayBoxShadowOuter(aBuilder, aFrame));
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
// Create dedicated background display items per-frame when we're
|
|
// handling events.
|
|
// XXX how to handle collapsed borders?
|
|
if (aBuilder->IsForEventDelivery()) {
|
|
nsDisplayBackgroundImage::AppendBackgroundItemsToTop(aBuilder, aFrame,
|
|
lists->BorderBackground());
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
// Paint the inset box-shadows for the table frames
|
|
if (hasBoxShadow) {
|
|
lists->BorderBackground()->AppendNewToTop(
|
|
new (aBuilder) nsDisplayBoxShadowInner(aBuilder, aFrame));
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
aTraversal(aBuilder, aFrame, aDirtyRect, *lists);
|
|
|
|
if (sortEventBackgrounds) {
|
|
// Ensure that the table frame event background goes before the
|
|
// table rowgroups event backgrounds, before the table row event backgrounds,
|
|
// before everything else (cells and their blocks)
|
|
separatedCollection.BorderBackground()->Sort(aBuilder, CompareByTablePartRank, nullptr);
|
|
separatedCollection.MoveTo(aLists);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
aFrame->DisplayOutline(aBuilder, aLists);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
static bool
|
|
AnyTablePartHasBorderOrBackground(nsIFrame* aStart, nsIFrame* aEnd)
|
|
{
|
|
for (nsIFrame* f = aStart; f != aEnd; f = f->GetNextSibling()) {
|
|
NS_ASSERTION(IsFrameAllowedInTable(f->GetType()), "unexpected frame type");
|
|
|
|
if (FrameHasBorderOrBackground(f))
|
|
return true;
|
|
|
|
nsTableCellFrame *cellFrame = do_QueryFrame(f);
|
|
if (cellFrame)
|
|
continue;
|
|
|
|
if (AnyTablePartHasBorderOrBackground(f->PrincipalChildList().FirstChild(), nullptr))
|
|
return true;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
return false;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
static void
|
|
UpdateItemForColGroupBackgrounds(nsDisplayTableItem* item,
|
|
const nsFrameList& aFrames) {
|
|
for (nsFrameList::Enumerator e(aFrames); !e.AtEnd(); e.Next()) {
|
|
nsTableColGroupFrame* cg = static_cast<nsTableColGroupFrame*>(e.get());
|
|
item->UpdateForFrameBackground(cg);
|
|
for (nsTableColFrame* colFrame = cg->GetFirstColumn(); colFrame;
|
|
colFrame = colFrame->GetNextCol()) {
|
|
item->UpdateForFrameBackground(colFrame);
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
// table paint code is concerned primarily with borders and bg color
|
|
// SEC: TODO: adjust the rect for captions
|
|
void
|
|
nsTableFrame::BuildDisplayList(nsDisplayListBuilder* aBuilder,
|
|
const nsRect& aDirtyRect,
|
|
const nsDisplayListSet& aLists)
|
|
{
|
|
DO_GLOBAL_REFLOW_COUNT_DSP_COLOR("nsTableFrame", NS_RGB(255,128,255));
|
|
|
|
nsDisplayTableItem* item = nullptr;
|
|
if (IsVisibleInSelection(aBuilder)) {
|
|
if (StyleVisibility()->IsVisible()) {
|
|
nsMargin deflate = GetDeflationForBackground(PresContext());
|
|
// If 'deflate' is (0,0,0,0) then we can paint the table background
|
|
// in its own display item, so do that to take advantage of
|
|
// opacity and visibility optimizations
|
|
if (deflate == nsMargin(0, 0, 0, 0)) {
|
|
DisplayBackgroundUnconditional(aBuilder, aLists, false);
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
// This background is created if any of the table parts are visible,
|
|
// or if we're doing event handling (since DisplayGenericTablePart
|
|
// needs the item for the |sortEventBackgrounds|-dependent code).
|
|
// Specific visibility decisions are delegated to the table background
|
|
// painter, which handles borders and backgrounds for the table.
|
|
if (aBuilder->IsForEventDelivery() ||
|
|
AnyTablePartHasBorderOrBackground(this, GetNextSibling()) ||
|
|
AnyTablePartHasBorderOrBackground(mColGroups.FirstChild(), nullptr)) {
|
|
item = new (aBuilder) nsDisplayTableBorderBackground(aBuilder, this);
|
|
aLists.BorderBackground()->AppendNewToTop(item);
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
DisplayGenericTablePart(aBuilder, this, aDirtyRect, aLists, item);
|
|
if (item) {
|
|
UpdateItemForColGroupBackgrounds(item, mColGroups);
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
nsMargin
|
|
nsTableFrame::GetDeflationForBackground(nsPresContext* aPresContext) const
|
|
{
|
|
if (eCompatibility_NavQuirks != aPresContext->CompatibilityMode() ||
|
|
!IsBorderCollapse())
|
|
return nsMargin(0,0,0,0);
|
|
|
|
WritingMode wm = GetWritingMode();
|
|
return GetOuterBCBorder(wm).GetPhysicalMargin(wm);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
// XXX We don't put the borders and backgrounds in tree order like we should.
|
|
// That requires some major surgery which we aren't going to do right now.
|
|
DrawResult
|
|
nsTableFrame::PaintTableBorderBackground(nsRenderingContext& aRenderingContext,
|
|
const nsRect& aDirtyRect,
|
|
nsPoint aPt, uint32_t aBGPaintFlags)
|
|
{
|
|
nsPresContext* presContext = PresContext();
|
|
|
|
TableBackgroundPainter painter(this, TableBackgroundPainter::eOrigin_Table,
|
|
presContext, aRenderingContext,
|
|
aDirtyRect, aPt, aBGPaintFlags);
|
|
nsMargin deflate = GetDeflationForBackground(presContext);
|
|
// If 'deflate' is (0,0,0,0) then we'll paint the table background
|
|
// in a separate display item, so don't do it here.
|
|
DrawResult result =
|
|
painter.PaintTable(this, deflate, deflate != nsMargin(0, 0, 0, 0));
|
|
|
|
if (StyleVisibility()->IsVisible()) {
|
|
if (!IsBorderCollapse()) {
|
|
Sides skipSides = GetSkipSides();
|
|
nsRect rect(aPt, mRect.Size());
|
|
nsCSSRendering::PaintBorder(presContext, aRenderingContext, this,
|
|
aDirtyRect, rect, mStyleContext, skipSides);
|
|
}
|
|
else {
|
|
gfxContext* ctx = aRenderingContext.ThebesContext();
|
|
|
|
gfxPoint devPixelOffset =
|
|
nsLayoutUtils::PointToGfxPoint(aPt,
|
|
PresContext()->AppUnitsPerDevPixel());
|
|
|
|
// XXX we should probably get rid of this translation at some stage
|
|
// But that would mean modifying PaintBCBorders, ugh
|
|
gfxContextMatrixAutoSaveRestore autoSR(ctx);
|
|
ctx->SetMatrix(ctx->CurrentMatrix().Translate(devPixelOffset));
|
|
|
|
PaintBCBorders(aRenderingContext, aDirtyRect - aPt);
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
return result;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
nsIFrame::LogicalSides
|
|
nsTableFrame::GetLogicalSkipSides(const nsHTMLReflowState* aReflowState) const
|
|
{
|
|
if (MOZ_UNLIKELY(StyleBorder()->mBoxDecorationBreak ==
|
|
NS_STYLE_BOX_DECORATION_BREAK_CLONE)) {
|
|
return LogicalSides();
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
LogicalSides skip;
|
|
// frame attribute was accounted for in nsHTMLTableElement::MapTableBorderInto
|
|
// account for pagination
|
|
if (nullptr != GetPrevInFlow()) {
|
|
skip |= eLogicalSideBitsBStart;
|
|
}
|
|
if (nullptr != GetNextInFlow()) {
|
|
skip |= eLogicalSideBitsBEnd;
|
|
}
|
|
return skip;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
void
|
|
nsTableFrame::SetColumnDimensions(nscoord aBSize, WritingMode aWM,
|
|
const LogicalMargin& aBorderPadding,
|
|
const nsSize& aContainerSize)
|
|
{
|
|
const nscoord colBSize = aBSize - (aBorderPadding.BStartEnd(aWM) +
|
|
GetRowSpacing(-1) + GetRowSpacing(GetRowCount()));
|
|
int32_t colIdx = 0;
|
|
LogicalPoint colGroupOrigin(aWM,
|
|
aBorderPadding.IStart(aWM) + GetColSpacing(-1),
|
|
aBorderPadding.BStart(aWM) + GetRowSpacing(-1));
|
|
nsTableFrame* fif = static_cast<nsTableFrame*>(FirstInFlow());
|
|
for (nsIFrame* colGroupFrame : mColGroups) {
|
|
MOZ_ASSERT(colGroupFrame->GetType() == nsGkAtoms::tableColGroupFrame);
|
|
// first we need to figure out the size of the colgroup
|
|
int32_t groupFirstCol = colIdx;
|
|
nscoord colGroupISize = 0;
|
|
nscoord cellSpacingI = 0;
|
|
const nsFrameList& columnList = colGroupFrame->PrincipalChildList();
|
|
for (nsIFrame* colFrame : columnList) {
|
|
if (NS_STYLE_DISPLAY_TABLE_COLUMN ==
|
|
colFrame->StyleDisplay()->mDisplay) {
|
|
NS_ASSERTION(colIdx < GetColCount(), "invalid number of columns");
|
|
cellSpacingI = GetColSpacing(colIdx);
|
|
colGroupISize += fif->GetColumnISizeFromFirstInFlow(colIdx) +
|
|
cellSpacingI;
|
|
++colIdx;
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
if (colGroupISize) {
|
|
colGroupISize -= cellSpacingI;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
LogicalRect colGroupRect(aWM, colGroupOrigin.I(aWM), colGroupOrigin.B(aWM),
|
|
colGroupISize, colBSize);
|
|
colGroupFrame->SetRect(aWM, colGroupRect, aContainerSize);
|
|
nsSize colGroupSize = colGroupFrame->GetSize();
|
|
|
|
// then we can place the columns correctly within the group
|
|
colIdx = groupFirstCol;
|
|
LogicalPoint colOrigin(aWM);
|
|
for (nsIFrame* colFrame : columnList) {
|
|
if (NS_STYLE_DISPLAY_TABLE_COLUMN ==
|
|
colFrame->StyleDisplay()->mDisplay) {
|
|
nscoord colISize = fif->GetColumnISizeFromFirstInFlow(colIdx);
|
|
LogicalRect colRect(aWM, colOrigin.I(aWM), colOrigin.B(aWM),
|
|
colISize, colBSize);
|
|
colFrame->SetRect(aWM, colRect, colGroupSize);
|
|
cellSpacingI = GetColSpacing(colIdx);
|
|
colOrigin.I(aWM) += colISize + cellSpacingI;
|
|
++colIdx;
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
colGroupOrigin.I(aWM) += colGroupISize + cellSpacingI;
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
// SEC: TODO need to worry about continuing frames prev/next in flow for splitting across pages.
|
|
|
|
// XXX this could be made more general to handle row modifications that change the
|
|
// table bsize, but first we need to scrutinize every Invalidate
|
|
void
|
|
nsTableFrame::ProcessRowInserted(nscoord aNewBSize)
|
|
{
|
|
SetRowInserted(false); // reset the bit that got us here
|
|
nsTableFrame::RowGroupArray rowGroups;
|
|
OrderRowGroups(rowGroups);
|
|
// find the row group containing the inserted row
|
|
for (uint32_t rgIdx = 0; rgIdx < rowGroups.Length(); rgIdx++) {
|
|
nsTableRowGroupFrame* rgFrame = rowGroups[rgIdx];
|
|
NS_ASSERTION(rgFrame, "Must have rgFrame here");
|
|
nsIFrame* childFrame = rgFrame->GetFirstPrincipalChild();
|
|
// find the row that was inserted first
|
|
while (childFrame) {
|
|
nsTableRowFrame *rowFrame = do_QueryFrame(childFrame);
|
|
if (rowFrame) {
|
|
if (rowFrame->IsFirstInserted()) {
|
|
rowFrame->SetFirstInserted(false);
|
|
// damage the table from the 1st row inserted to the end of the table
|
|
nsIFrame::InvalidateFrame();
|
|
// XXXbz didn't we do this up front? Why do we need to do it again?
|
|
SetRowInserted(false);
|
|
return; // found it, so leave
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
childFrame = childFrame->GetNextSibling();
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/* virtual */ void
|
|
nsTableFrame::MarkIntrinsicISizesDirty()
|
|
{
|
|
nsITableLayoutStrategy* tls = LayoutStrategy();
|
|
if (MOZ_UNLIKELY(!tls)) {
|
|
// This is a FrameNeedsReflow() from nsBlockFrame::RemoveFrame()
|
|
// walking up the ancestor chain in a table next-in-flow. In this case
|
|
// our original first-in-flow (which owns the TableLayoutStrategy) has
|
|
// already been destroyed and unhooked from the flow chain and thusly
|
|
// LayoutStrategy() returns null. All the frames in the flow will be
|
|
// destroyed so no need to mark anything dirty here. See bug 595758.
|
|
return;
|
|
}
|
|
tls->MarkIntrinsicISizesDirty();
|
|
|
|
// XXXldb Call SetBCDamageArea?
|
|
|
|
nsContainerFrame::MarkIntrinsicISizesDirty();
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/* virtual */ nscoord
|
|
nsTableFrame::GetMinISize(nsRenderingContext *aRenderingContext)
|
|
{
|
|
if (NeedToCalcBCBorders())
|
|
CalcBCBorders();
|
|
|
|
ReflowColGroups(aRenderingContext);
|
|
|
|
return LayoutStrategy()->GetMinISize(aRenderingContext);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/* virtual */ nscoord
|
|
nsTableFrame::GetPrefISize(nsRenderingContext *aRenderingContext)
|
|
{
|
|
if (NeedToCalcBCBorders())
|
|
CalcBCBorders();
|
|
|
|
ReflowColGroups(aRenderingContext);
|
|
|
|
return LayoutStrategy()->GetPrefISize(aRenderingContext, false);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/* virtual */ nsIFrame::IntrinsicISizeOffsetData
|
|
nsTableFrame::IntrinsicISizeOffsets()
|
|
{
|
|
IntrinsicISizeOffsetData result = nsContainerFrame::IntrinsicISizeOffsets();
|
|
|
|
result.hMargin = 0;
|
|
result.hPctMargin = 0;
|
|
|
|
if (IsBorderCollapse()) {
|
|
result.hPadding = 0;
|
|
result.hPctPadding = 0;
|
|
|
|
WritingMode wm = GetWritingMode();
|
|
LogicalMargin outerBC = GetIncludedOuterBCBorder(wm);
|
|
result.hBorder = outerBC.IStartEnd(wm);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
return result;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/* virtual */
|
|
LogicalSize
|
|
nsTableFrame::ComputeSize(nsRenderingContext *aRenderingContext,
|
|
WritingMode aWM,
|
|
const LogicalSize& aCBSize,
|
|
nscoord aAvailableISize,
|
|
const LogicalSize& aMargin,
|
|
const LogicalSize& aBorder,
|
|
const LogicalSize& aPadding,
|
|
ComputeSizeFlags aFlags)
|
|
{
|
|
LogicalSize result =
|
|
nsContainerFrame::ComputeSize(aRenderingContext, aWM,
|
|
aCBSize, aAvailableISize,
|
|
aMargin, aBorder, aPadding, aFlags);
|
|
|
|
// XXX The code below doesn't make sense if the caller's writing mode
|
|
// is orthogonal to this frame's. Not sure yet what should happen then;
|
|
// for now, just bail out.
|
|
if (aWM.IsVertical() != GetWritingMode().IsVertical()) {
|
|
return result;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
// If we're a container for font size inflation, then shrink
|
|
// wrapping inside of us should not apply font size inflation.
|
|
AutoMaybeDisableFontInflation an(this);
|
|
|
|
// Tables never shrink below their min inline-size.
|
|
nscoord minISize = GetMinISize(aRenderingContext);
|
|
if (minISize > result.ISize(aWM)) {
|
|
result.ISize(aWM) = minISize;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
return result;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
nscoord
|
|
nsTableFrame::TableShrinkISizeToFit(nsRenderingContext *aRenderingContext,
|
|
nscoord aISizeInCB)
|
|
{
|
|
// If we're a container for font size inflation, then shrink
|
|
// wrapping inside of us should not apply font size inflation.
|
|
AutoMaybeDisableFontInflation an(this);
|
|
|
|
nscoord result;
|
|
nscoord minISize = GetMinISize(aRenderingContext);
|
|
if (minISize > aISizeInCB) {
|
|
result = minISize;
|
|
} else {
|
|
// Tables shrink inline-size to fit with a slightly different algorithm
|
|
// from the one they use for their intrinsic isize (the difference
|
|
// relates to handling of percentage isizes on columns). So this
|
|
// function differs from nsFrame::ShrinkWidthToFit by only the
|
|
// following line.
|
|
// Since we've already called GetMinISize, we don't need to do any
|
|
// of the other stuff GetPrefISize does.
|
|
nscoord prefISize =
|
|
LayoutStrategy()->GetPrefISize(aRenderingContext, true);
|
|
if (prefISize > aISizeInCB) {
|
|
result = aISizeInCB;
|
|
} else {
|
|
result = prefISize;
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
return result;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/* virtual */
|
|
LogicalSize
|
|
nsTableFrame::ComputeAutoSize(nsRenderingContext *aRenderingContext,
|
|
WritingMode aWM,
|
|
const LogicalSize& aCBSize,
|
|
nscoord aAvailableISize,
|
|
const LogicalSize& aMargin,
|
|
const LogicalSize& aBorder,
|
|
const LogicalSize& aPadding,
|
|
bool aShrinkWrap)
|
|
{
|
|
// Tables always shrink-wrap.
|
|
nscoord cbBased = aAvailableISize - aMargin.ISize(aWM) - aBorder.ISize(aWM) -
|
|
aPadding.ISize(aWM);
|
|
return LogicalSize(aWM, TableShrinkISizeToFit(aRenderingContext, cbBased),
|
|
NS_UNCONSTRAINEDSIZE);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
// Return true if aParentReflowState.frame or any of its ancestors within
|
|
// the containing table have non-auto bsize. (e.g. pct or fixed bsize)
|
|
bool
|
|
nsTableFrame::AncestorsHaveStyleBSize(const nsHTMLReflowState& aParentReflowState)
|
|
{
|
|
WritingMode wm = aParentReflowState.GetWritingMode();
|
|
for (const nsHTMLReflowState* rs = &aParentReflowState;
|
|
rs && rs->frame; rs = rs->parentReflowState) {
|
|
nsIAtom* frameType = rs->frame->GetType();
|
|
if (IS_TABLE_CELL(frameType) ||
|
|
(nsGkAtoms::tableRowFrame == frameType) ||
|
|
(nsGkAtoms::tableRowGroupFrame == frameType)) {
|
|
const nsStyleCoord &bsize = rs->mStylePosition->BSize(wm);
|
|
// calc() with percentages treated like 'auto' on internal table elements
|
|
if (bsize.GetUnit() != eStyleUnit_Auto &&
|
|
(!bsize.IsCalcUnit() || !bsize.HasPercent())) {
|
|
return true;
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
else if (nsGkAtoms::tableFrame == frameType) {
|
|
// we reached the containing table, so always return
|
|
return rs->mStylePosition->BSize(wm).GetUnit() != eStyleUnit_Auto;
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
return false;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
// See if a special block-size reflow needs to occur and if so,
|
|
// call RequestSpecialBSizeReflow
|
|
void
|
|
nsTableFrame::CheckRequestSpecialBSizeReflow(const nsHTMLReflowState& aReflowState)
|
|
{
|
|
NS_ASSERTION(IS_TABLE_CELL(aReflowState.frame->GetType()) ||
|
|
aReflowState.frame->GetType() == nsGkAtoms::tableRowFrame ||
|
|
aReflowState.frame->GetType() == nsGkAtoms::tableRowGroupFrame ||
|
|
aReflowState.frame->GetType() == nsGkAtoms::tableFrame,
|
|
"unexpected frame type");
|
|
WritingMode wm = aReflowState.GetWritingMode();
|
|
if (!aReflowState.frame->GetPrevInFlow() && // 1st in flow
|
|
(NS_UNCONSTRAINEDSIZE == aReflowState.ComputedBSize() || // no computed bsize
|
|
0 == aReflowState.ComputedBSize()) &&
|
|
eStyleUnit_Percent == aReflowState.mStylePosition->BSize(wm).GetUnit() && // pct bsize
|
|
nsTableFrame::AncestorsHaveStyleBSize(*aReflowState.parentReflowState)) {
|
|
nsTableFrame::RequestSpecialBSizeReflow(aReflowState);
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
// Notify the frame and its ancestors (up to the containing table) that a special
|
|
// bsize reflow will occur. During a special bsize reflow, a table, row group,
|
|
// row, or cell returns the last size it was reflowed at. However, the table may
|
|
// change the bsize of row groups, rows, cells in DistributeBSizeToRows after.
|
|
// And the row group can change the bsize of rows, cells in CalculateRowBSizes.
|
|
void
|
|
nsTableFrame::RequestSpecialBSizeReflow(const nsHTMLReflowState& aReflowState)
|
|
{
|
|
// notify the frame and its ancestors of the special reflow, stopping at the containing table
|
|
for (const nsHTMLReflowState* rs = &aReflowState; rs && rs->frame; rs = rs->parentReflowState) {
|
|
nsIAtom* frameType = rs->frame->GetType();
|
|
NS_ASSERTION(IS_TABLE_CELL(frameType) ||
|
|
nsGkAtoms::tableRowFrame == frameType ||
|
|
nsGkAtoms::tableRowGroupFrame == frameType ||
|
|
nsGkAtoms::tableFrame == frameType,
|
|
"unexpected frame type");
|
|
|
|
rs->frame->AddStateBits(NS_FRAME_CONTAINS_RELATIVE_BSIZE);
|
|
if (nsGkAtoms::tableFrame == frameType) {
|
|
NS_ASSERTION(rs != &aReflowState,
|
|
"should not request special bsize reflow for table");
|
|
// always stop when we reach a table
|
|
break;
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/******************************************************************************************
|
|
* Before reflow, intrinsic inline-size calculation is done using GetMinISize
|
|
* and GetPrefISize. This used to be known as pass 1 reflow.
|
|
*
|
|
* After the intrinsic isize calculation, the table determines the
|
|
* column widths using BalanceColumnISizes() and
|
|
* then reflows each child again with a constrained avail isize. This reflow is referred to
|
|
* as the pass 2 reflow.
|
|
*
|
|
* A special bsize reflow (pass 3 reflow) can occur during an initial or resize reflow
|
|
* if (a) a row group, row, cell, or a frame inside a cell has a percent bsize but no computed
|
|
* bsize or (b) in paginated mode, a table has a bsize. (a) supports percent nested tables
|
|
* contained inside cells whose bsizes aren't known until after the pass 2 reflow. (b) is
|
|
* necessary because the table cannot split until after the pass 2 reflow. The mechanics of
|
|
* the special bsize reflow (variety a) are as follows:
|
|
*
|
|
* 1) Each table related frame (table, row group, row, cell) implements NeedsSpecialReflow()
|
|
* to indicate that it should get the reflow. It does this when it has a percent bsize but
|
|
* no computed bsize by calling CheckRequestSpecialBSizeReflow(). This method calls
|
|
* RequestSpecialBSizeReflow() which calls SetNeedSpecialReflow() on its ancestors until
|
|
* it reaches the containing table and calls SetNeedToInitiateSpecialReflow() on it. For
|
|
* percent bsize frames inside cells, during DidReflow(), the cell's NotifyPercentBSize()
|
|
* is called (the cell is the reflow state's mPercentBSizeObserver in this case).
|
|
* NotifyPercentBSize() calls RequestSpecialBSizeReflow().
|
|
*
|
|
* XXX (jfkthame) This comment appears to be out of date; it refers to methods/flags
|
|
* that are no longer present in the code.
|
|
* 2) After the pass 2 reflow, if the table's NeedToInitiateSpecialReflow(true) was called, it
|
|
* will do the special bsize reflow, setting the reflow state's mFlags.mSpecialBSizeReflow
|
|
* to true and mSpecialHeightInitiator to itself. It won't do this if IsPrematureSpecialHeightReflow()
|
|
* returns true because in that case another special bsize reflow will be coming along with the
|
|
* containing table as the mSpecialHeightInitiator. It is only relevant to do the reflow when
|
|
* the mSpecialHeightInitiator is the containing table, because if it is a remote ancestor, then
|
|
* appropriate bsizes will not be known.
|
|
*
|
|
* 3) Since the bsizes of the table, row groups, rows, and cells was determined during the pass 2
|
|
* reflow, they return their last desired sizes during the special bsize reflow. The reflow only
|
|
* permits percent bsize frames inside the cells to resize based on the cells bsize and that bsize
|
|
* was determined during the pass 2 reflow.
|
|
*
|
|
* So, in the case of deeply nested tables, all of the tables that were told to initiate a special
|
|
* reflow will do so, but if a table is already in a special reflow, it won't inititate the reflow
|
|
* until the current initiator is its containing table. Since these reflows are only received by
|
|
* frames that need them and they don't cause any rebalancing of tables, the extra overhead is minimal.
|
|
*
|
|
* The type of special reflow that occurs during printing (variety b) follows the same mechanism except
|
|
* that all frames will receive the reflow even if they don't really need them.
|
|
*
|
|
* Open issues with the special bsize reflow:
|
|
*
|
|
* 1) At some point there should be 2 kinds of special bsize reflows because (a) and (b) above are
|
|
* really quite different. This would avoid unnecessary reflows during printing.
|
|
* 2) When a cell contains frames whose percent bsizes > 100%, there is data loss (see bug 115245).
|
|
* However, this can also occur if a cell has a fixed bsize and there is no special bsize reflow.
|
|
*
|
|
* XXXldb Special bsize reflow should really be its own method, not
|
|
* part of nsIFrame::Reflow. It should then call nsIFrame::Reflow on
|
|
* the contents of the cells to do the necessary block-axis resizing.
|
|
*
|
|
******************************************************************************************/
|
|
|
|
/* Layout the entire inner table. */
|
|
void
|
|
nsTableFrame::Reflow(nsPresContext* aPresContext,
|
|
nsHTMLReflowMetrics& aDesiredSize,
|
|
const nsHTMLReflowState& aReflowState,
|
|
nsReflowStatus& aStatus)
|
|
{
|
|
MarkInReflow();
|
|
DO_GLOBAL_REFLOW_COUNT("nsTableFrame");
|
|
DISPLAY_REFLOW(aPresContext, this, aReflowState, aDesiredSize, aStatus);
|
|
bool isPaginated = aPresContext->IsPaginated();
|
|
WritingMode wm = aReflowState.GetWritingMode();
|
|
|
|
aStatus = NS_FRAME_COMPLETE;
|
|
if (!GetPrevInFlow() && !mTableLayoutStrategy) {
|
|
NS_ERROR("strategy should have been created in Init");
|
|
return;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
// see if collapsing borders need to be calculated
|
|
if (!GetPrevInFlow() && IsBorderCollapse() && NeedToCalcBCBorders()) {
|
|
CalcBCBorders();
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
aDesiredSize.ISize(wm) = aReflowState.AvailableISize();
|
|
|
|
// Check for an overflow list, and append any row group frames being pushed
|
|
MoveOverflowToChildList();
|
|
|
|
bool haveDesiredBSize = false;
|
|
SetHaveReflowedColGroups(false);
|
|
|
|
// Reflow the entire table (pass 2 and possibly pass 3). This phase is necessary during a
|
|
// constrained initial reflow and other reflows which require either a strategy init or balance.
|
|
// This isn't done during an unconstrained reflow, because it will occur later when the parent
|
|
// reflows with a constrained isize.
|
|
bool fixupKidPositions = false;
|
|
if (NS_SUBTREE_DIRTY(this) ||
|
|
aReflowState.ShouldReflowAllKids() ||
|
|
IsGeometryDirty() ||
|
|
aReflowState.IsBResize()) {
|
|
|
|
if (aReflowState.ComputedBSize() != NS_UNCONSTRAINEDSIZE ||
|
|
// Also check IsBResize(), to handle the first Reflow preceding a
|
|
// special bsize Reflow, when we've already had a special bsize
|
|
// Reflow (where ComputedBSize() would not be
|
|
// NS_UNCONSTRAINEDSIZE, but without a style change in between).
|
|
aReflowState.IsBResize()) {
|
|
// XXX Eventually, we should modify DistributeBSizeToRows to use
|
|
// nsTableRowFrame::GetInitialBSize instead of nsIFrame::BSize().
|
|
// That way, it will make its calculations based on internal table
|
|
// frame bsizes as they are before they ever had any extra bsize
|
|
// distributed to them. In the meantime, this reflows all the
|
|
// internal table frames, which restores them to their state before
|
|
// DistributeBSizeToRows was called.
|
|
SetGeometryDirty();
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
bool needToInitiateSpecialReflow =
|
|
HasAnyStateBits(NS_FRAME_CONTAINS_RELATIVE_BSIZE);
|
|
// see if an extra reflow will be necessary in pagination mode
|
|
// when there is a specified table bsize
|
|
if (isPaginated && !GetPrevInFlow() && (NS_UNCONSTRAINEDSIZE != aReflowState.AvailableBSize())) {
|
|
nscoord tableSpecifiedBSize = CalcBorderBoxBSize(aReflowState);
|
|
if ((tableSpecifiedBSize > 0) &&
|
|
(tableSpecifiedBSize != NS_UNCONSTRAINEDSIZE)) {
|
|
needToInitiateSpecialReflow = true;
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
nsIFrame* lastChildReflowed = nullptr;
|
|
|
|
NS_ASSERTION(!aReflowState.mFlags.mSpecialBSizeReflow,
|
|
"Shouldn't be in special bsize reflow here!");
|
|
|
|
// do the pass 2 reflow unless this is a special bsize reflow and we will be
|
|
// initiating a special bsize reflow
|
|
// XXXldb I changed this. Should I change it back?
|
|
|
|
// if we need to initiate a special bsize reflow, then don't constrain the
|
|
// bsize of the reflow before that
|
|
nscoord availBSize = needToInitiateSpecialReflow
|
|
? NS_UNCONSTRAINEDSIZE
|
|
: aReflowState.AvailableBSize();
|
|
|
|
ReflowTable(aDesiredSize, aReflowState, availBSize,
|
|
lastChildReflowed, aStatus);
|
|
// If ComputedWidth is unconstrained, we may need to fix child positions
|
|
// later (in vertical-rl mode) due to use of 0 as a dummy
|
|
// containerSize.width during ReflowChildren.
|
|
fixupKidPositions = wm.IsVerticalRL() &&
|
|
aReflowState.ComputedWidth() == NS_UNCONSTRAINEDSIZE;
|
|
|
|
// reevaluate special bsize reflow conditions
|
|
if (HasAnyStateBits(NS_FRAME_CONTAINS_RELATIVE_BSIZE)) {
|
|
needToInitiateSpecialReflow = true;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
// XXXldb Are all these conditions correct?
|
|
if (needToInitiateSpecialReflow && NS_FRAME_IS_COMPLETE(aStatus)) {
|
|
// XXXldb Do we need to set the IsBResize flag on any reflow states?
|
|
|
|
nsHTMLReflowState &mutable_rs =
|
|
const_cast<nsHTMLReflowState&>(aReflowState);
|
|
|
|
// distribute extra block-direction space to rows
|
|
CalcDesiredBSize(aReflowState, aDesiredSize);
|
|
mutable_rs.mFlags.mSpecialBSizeReflow = true;
|
|
|
|
ReflowTable(aDesiredSize, aReflowState, aReflowState.AvailableBSize(),
|
|
lastChildReflowed, aStatus);
|
|
|
|
if (lastChildReflowed && NS_FRAME_IS_NOT_COMPLETE(aStatus)) {
|
|
// if there is an incomplete child, then set the desired bsize
|
|
// to include it but not the next one
|
|
LogicalMargin borderPadding = GetChildAreaOffset(wm, &aReflowState);
|
|
aDesiredSize.BSize(wm) =
|
|
borderPadding.BEnd(wm) + GetRowSpacing(GetRowCount()) +
|
|
lastChildReflowed->GetNormalRect().YMost(); // XXX YMost should be B-flavored
|
|
}
|
|
haveDesiredBSize = true;
|
|
|
|
mutable_rs.mFlags.mSpecialBSizeReflow = false;
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
aDesiredSize.ISize(wm) = aReflowState.ComputedISize() +
|
|
aReflowState.ComputedLogicalBorderPadding().IStartEnd(wm);
|
|
if (!haveDesiredBSize) {
|
|
CalcDesiredBSize(aReflowState, aDesiredSize);
|
|
}
|
|
if (IsRowInserted()) {
|
|
ProcessRowInserted(aDesiredSize.BSize(wm));
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
if (fixupKidPositions) {
|
|
// If we didn't already know the containerSize (and so used zero during
|
|
// ReflowChildren), then we need to update the block-position of our kids.
|
|
for (nsIFrame* kid : mFrames) {
|
|
kid->MovePositionBy(nsPoint(aDesiredSize.Width(), 0));
|
|
RePositionViews(kid);
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
// Calculate the overflow area contribution from our children. We couldn't
|
|
// do this on the fly during ReflowChildren(), because in vertical-rl mode
|
|
// with unconstrained width, we weren't placing them in their final positions
|
|
// until the fixupKidPositions loop just above.
|
|
for (nsIFrame* kid : mFrames) {
|
|
ConsiderChildOverflow(aDesiredSize.mOverflowAreas, kid);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
LogicalMargin borderPadding = GetChildAreaOffset(wm, &aReflowState);
|
|
SetColumnDimensions(aDesiredSize.BSize(wm), wm, borderPadding,
|
|
aDesiredSize.PhysicalSize());
|
|
if (NeedToCollapse() &&
|
|
(NS_UNCONSTRAINEDSIZE != aReflowState.AvailableISize())) {
|
|
AdjustForCollapsingRowsCols(aDesiredSize, wm, borderPadding);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
// If there are any relatively-positioned table parts, we need to reflow their
|
|
// absolutely-positioned descendants now that their dimensions are final.
|
|
FixupPositionedTableParts(aPresContext, aDesiredSize, aReflowState);
|
|
|
|
// make sure the table overflow area does include the table rect.
|
|
nsRect tableRect(0, 0, aDesiredSize.Width(), aDesiredSize.Height()) ;
|
|
|
|
if (!ShouldApplyOverflowClipping(this, aReflowState.mStyleDisplay)) {
|
|
// collapsed border may leak out
|
|
LogicalMargin bcMargin = GetExcludedOuterBCBorder(wm);
|
|
tableRect.Inflate(bcMargin.GetPhysicalMargin(wm));
|
|
}
|
|
aDesiredSize.mOverflowAreas.UnionAllWith(tableRect);
|
|
|
|
if (HasAnyStateBits(NS_FRAME_FIRST_REFLOW) ||
|
|
nsSize(aDesiredSize.Width(), aDesiredSize.Height()) != mRect.Size()) {
|
|
nsIFrame::InvalidateFrame();
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
FinishAndStoreOverflow(&aDesiredSize);
|
|
NS_FRAME_SET_TRUNCATION(aStatus, aReflowState, aDesiredSize);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
void
|
|
nsTableFrame::FixupPositionedTableParts(nsPresContext* aPresContext,
|
|
nsHTMLReflowMetrics& aDesiredSize,
|
|
const nsHTMLReflowState& aReflowState)
|
|
{
|
|
auto positionedParts =
|
|
static_cast<FrameTArray*>(Properties().Get(PositionedTablePartArray()));
|
|
if (!positionedParts) {
|
|
return;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
OverflowChangedTracker overflowTracker;
|
|
overflowTracker.SetSubtreeRoot(this);
|
|
|
|
for (size_t i = 0; i < positionedParts->Length(); ++i) {
|
|
nsIFrame* positionedPart = positionedParts->ElementAt(i);
|
|
|
|
// As we've already finished reflow, positionedParts's size and overflow
|
|
// areas have already been assigned, so we just pull them back out.
|
|
nsSize size(positionedPart->GetSize());
|
|
nsHTMLReflowMetrics desiredSize(aReflowState.GetWritingMode());
|
|
desiredSize.Width() = size.width;
|
|
desiredSize.Height() = size.height;
|
|
desiredSize.mOverflowAreas = positionedPart->GetOverflowAreasRelativeToSelf();
|
|
|
|
// Construct a dummy reflow state and reflow status.
|
|
// XXX(seth): Note that the dummy reflow state doesn't have a correct
|
|
// chain of parent reflow states. It also doesn't necessarily have a
|
|
// correct containing block.
|
|
WritingMode wm = positionedPart->GetWritingMode();
|
|
LogicalSize availSize(wm, size);
|
|
availSize.BSize(wm) = NS_UNCONSTRAINEDSIZE;
|
|
nsHTMLReflowState reflowState(aPresContext, positionedPart,
|
|
aReflowState.rendContext, availSize,
|
|
nsHTMLReflowState::DUMMY_PARENT_REFLOW_STATE);
|
|
nsReflowStatus reflowStatus = NS_FRAME_COMPLETE;
|
|
|
|
// Reflow absolutely-positioned descendants of the positioned part.
|
|
// FIXME: Unconditionally using NS_UNCONSTRAINEDSIZE for the bsize and
|
|
// ignoring any change to the reflow status aren't correct. We'll never
|
|
// paginate absolutely positioned frames.
|
|
nsFrame* positionedFrame = static_cast<nsFrame*>(positionedPart);
|
|
positionedFrame->FinishReflowWithAbsoluteFrames(PresContext(),
|
|
desiredSize,
|
|
reflowState,
|
|
reflowStatus,
|
|
true);
|
|
|
|
// FinishReflowWithAbsoluteFrames has updated overflow on
|
|
// |positionedPart|. We need to make sure that update propagates
|
|
// through the intermediate frames between it and this frame.
|
|
nsIFrame* positionedFrameParent = positionedPart->GetParent();
|
|
if (positionedFrameParent != this) {
|
|
overflowTracker.AddFrame(positionedFrameParent,
|
|
OverflowChangedTracker::CHILDREN_CHANGED);
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
// Propagate updated overflow areas up the tree.
|
|
overflowTracker.Flush();
|
|
|
|
// Update our own overflow areas. (OverflowChangedTracker doesn't update the
|
|
// subtree root itself.)
|
|
aDesiredSize.SetOverflowAreasToDesiredBounds();
|
|
nsLayoutUtils::UnionChildOverflow(this, aDesiredSize.mOverflowAreas);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
bool
|
|
nsTableFrame::UpdateOverflow()
|
|
{
|
|
nsRect bounds(nsPoint(0, 0), GetSize());
|
|
|
|
// As above in Reflow, make sure the table overflow area includes the table
|
|
// rect, and check for collapsed borders leaking out.
|
|
if (!ShouldApplyOverflowClipping(this, StyleDisplay())) {
|
|
WritingMode wm = GetWritingMode();
|
|
LogicalMargin bcMargin = GetExcludedOuterBCBorder(wm);
|
|
bounds.Inflate(bcMargin.GetPhysicalMargin(wm));
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
nsOverflowAreas overflowAreas(bounds, bounds);
|
|
nsLayoutUtils::UnionChildOverflow(this, overflowAreas);
|
|
|
|
return FinishAndStoreOverflow(overflowAreas, GetSize());
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
void
|
|
nsTableFrame::ReflowTable(nsHTMLReflowMetrics& aDesiredSize,
|
|
const nsHTMLReflowState& aReflowState,
|
|
nscoord aAvailBSize,
|
|
nsIFrame*& aLastChildReflowed,
|
|
nsReflowStatus& aStatus)
|
|
{
|
|
aLastChildReflowed = nullptr;
|
|
|
|
if (!GetPrevInFlow()) {
|
|
mTableLayoutStrategy->ComputeColumnISizes(aReflowState);
|
|
}
|
|
// Constrain our reflow isize to the computed table isize (of the 1st in flow).
|
|
// and our reflow bsize to our avail bsize minus border, padding, cellspacing
|
|
WritingMode wm = aReflowState.GetWritingMode();
|
|
aDesiredSize.ISize(wm) = aReflowState.ComputedISize() +
|
|
aReflowState.ComputedLogicalBorderPadding().IStartEnd(wm);
|
|
nsTableReflowState reflowState(aReflowState,
|
|
LogicalSize(wm, aDesiredSize.ISize(wm),
|
|
aAvailBSize));
|
|
ReflowChildren(reflowState, aStatus, aLastChildReflowed,
|
|
aDesiredSize.mOverflowAreas);
|
|
|
|
ReflowColGroups(aReflowState.rendContext);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
nsIFrame*
|
|
nsTableFrame::GetFirstBodyRowGroupFrame()
|
|
{
|
|
nsIFrame* headerFrame = nullptr;
|
|
nsIFrame* footerFrame = nullptr;
|
|
|
|
for (nsIFrame* kidFrame : mFrames) {
|
|
const nsStyleDisplay* childDisplay = kidFrame->StyleDisplay();
|
|
|
|
// We expect the header and footer row group frames to be first, and we only
|
|
// allow one header and one footer
|
|
if (NS_STYLE_DISPLAY_TABLE_HEADER_GROUP == childDisplay->mDisplay) {
|
|
if (headerFrame) {
|
|
// We already have a header frame and so this header frame is treated
|
|
// like an ordinary body row group frame
|
|
return kidFrame;
|
|
}
|
|
headerFrame = kidFrame;
|
|
|
|
} else if (NS_STYLE_DISPLAY_TABLE_FOOTER_GROUP == childDisplay->mDisplay) {
|
|
if (footerFrame) {
|
|
// We already have a footer frame and so this footer frame is treated
|
|
// like an ordinary body row group frame
|
|
return kidFrame;
|
|
}
|
|
footerFrame = kidFrame;
|
|
|
|
} else if (NS_STYLE_DISPLAY_TABLE_ROW_GROUP == childDisplay->mDisplay) {
|
|
return kidFrame;
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
return nullptr;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
// Table specific version that takes into account repeated header and footer
|
|
// frames when continuing table frames
|
|
void
|
|
nsTableFrame::PushChildren(const RowGroupArray& aRowGroups,
|
|
int32_t aPushFrom)
|
|
{
|
|
NS_PRECONDITION(aPushFrom > 0, "pushing first child");
|
|
|
|
// extract the frames from the array into a sibling list
|
|
nsFrameList frames;
|
|
uint32_t childX;
|
|
for (childX = aPushFrom; childX < aRowGroups.Length(); ++childX) {
|
|
nsTableRowGroupFrame* rgFrame = aRowGroups[childX];
|
|
if (!rgFrame->IsRepeatable()) {
|
|
mFrames.RemoveFrame(rgFrame);
|
|
frames.AppendFrame(nullptr, rgFrame);
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
if (frames.IsEmpty()) {
|
|
return;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
nsTableFrame* nextInFlow = static_cast<nsTableFrame*>(GetNextInFlow());
|
|
if (nextInFlow) {
|
|
// Insert the frames after any repeated header and footer frames.
|
|
nsIFrame* firstBodyFrame = nextInFlow->GetFirstBodyRowGroupFrame();
|
|
nsIFrame* prevSibling = nullptr;
|
|
if (firstBodyFrame) {
|
|
prevSibling = firstBodyFrame->GetPrevSibling();
|
|
}
|
|
// When pushing and pulling frames we need to check for whether any
|
|
// views need to be reparented.
|
|
ReparentFrameViewList(frames, this, nextInFlow);
|
|
nextInFlow->mFrames.InsertFrames(nextInFlow, prevSibling,
|
|
frames);
|
|
}
|
|
else {
|
|
// Add the frames to our overflow list.
|
|
SetOverflowFrames(frames);
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
// collapsing row groups, rows, col groups and cols are accounted for after both passes of
|
|
// reflow so that it has no effect on the calculations of reflow.
|
|
void
|
|
nsTableFrame::AdjustForCollapsingRowsCols(nsHTMLReflowMetrics& aDesiredSize,
|
|
const WritingMode aWM,
|
|
const LogicalMargin& aBorderPadding)
|
|
{
|
|
nscoord bTotalOffset = 0; // total offset among all rows in all row groups
|
|
|
|
// reset the bit, it will be set again if row/rowgroup or col/colgroup are
|
|
// collapsed
|
|
SetNeedToCollapse(false);
|
|
|
|
// collapse the rows and/or row groups as necessary
|
|
// Get the ordered children
|
|
RowGroupArray rowGroups;
|
|
OrderRowGroups(rowGroups);
|
|
|
|
nsTableFrame* firstInFlow = static_cast<nsTableFrame*>(FirstInFlow());
|
|
nscoord iSize = firstInFlow->GetCollapsedISize(aWM, aBorderPadding);
|
|
nscoord rgISize = iSize - GetColSpacing(-1) -
|
|
GetColSpacing(GetColCount());
|
|
nsOverflowAreas overflow;
|
|
// Walk the list of children
|
|
for (uint32_t childX = 0; childX < rowGroups.Length(); childX++) {
|
|
nsTableRowGroupFrame* rgFrame = rowGroups[childX];
|
|
NS_ASSERTION(rgFrame, "Must have row group frame here");
|
|
bTotalOffset += rgFrame->CollapseRowGroupIfNecessary(bTotalOffset, rgISize,
|
|
aWM);
|
|
ConsiderChildOverflow(overflow, rgFrame);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
aDesiredSize.BSize(aWM) -= bTotalOffset;
|
|
aDesiredSize.ISize(aWM) = iSize;
|
|
overflow.UnionAllWith(nsRect(0, 0, aDesiredSize.Width(), aDesiredSize.Height()));
|
|
FinishAndStoreOverflow(overflow,
|
|
nsSize(aDesiredSize.Width(), aDesiredSize.Height()));
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
nscoord
|
|
nsTableFrame::GetCollapsedISize(const WritingMode aWM,
|
|
const LogicalMargin& aBorderPadding)
|
|
{
|
|
NS_ASSERTION(!GetPrevInFlow(), "GetCollapsedISize called on next in flow");
|
|
nscoord iSize = GetColSpacing(GetColCount());
|
|
iSize += aBorderPadding.IStartEnd(aWM);
|
|
nsTableFrame* fif = static_cast<nsTableFrame*>(FirstInFlow());
|
|
for (nsIFrame* groupFrame : mColGroups) {
|
|
const nsStyleVisibility* groupVis = groupFrame->StyleVisibility();
|
|
bool collapseGroup = (NS_STYLE_VISIBILITY_COLLAPSE == groupVis->mVisible);
|
|
nsTableColGroupFrame* cgFrame = (nsTableColGroupFrame*)groupFrame;
|
|
for (nsTableColFrame* colFrame = cgFrame->GetFirstColumn(); colFrame;
|
|
colFrame = colFrame->GetNextCol()) {
|
|
const nsStyleDisplay* colDisplay = colFrame->StyleDisplay();
|
|
nscoord colIdx = colFrame->GetColIndex();
|
|
if (NS_STYLE_DISPLAY_TABLE_COLUMN == colDisplay->mDisplay) {
|
|
const nsStyleVisibility* colVis = colFrame->StyleVisibility();
|
|
bool collapseCol = (NS_STYLE_VISIBILITY_COLLAPSE == colVis->mVisible);
|
|
nscoord colISize = fif->GetColumnISizeFromFirstInFlow(colIdx);
|
|
if (!collapseGroup && !collapseCol) {
|
|
iSize += colISize;
|
|
if (ColumnHasCellSpacingBefore(colIdx)) {
|
|
iSize += GetColSpacing(colIdx - 1);
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
else {
|
|
SetNeedToCollapse(true);
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
return iSize;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/* virtual */ void
|
|
nsTableFrame::DidSetStyleContext(nsStyleContext* aOldStyleContext)
|
|
{
|
|
nsContainerFrame::DidSetStyleContext(aOldStyleContext);
|
|
|
|
if (!aOldStyleContext) //avoid this on init
|
|
return;
|
|
|
|
if (IsBorderCollapse() &&
|
|
BCRecalcNeeded(aOldStyleContext, StyleContext())) {
|
|
SetFullBCDamageArea();
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
//avoid this on init or nextinflow
|
|
if (!mTableLayoutStrategy || GetPrevInFlow())
|
|
return;
|
|
|
|
bool isAuto = IsAutoLayout();
|
|
if (isAuto != (LayoutStrategy()->GetType() == nsITableLayoutStrategy::Auto)) {
|
|
nsITableLayoutStrategy* temp;
|
|
if (isAuto)
|
|
temp = new BasicTableLayoutStrategy(this);
|
|
else
|
|
temp = new FixedTableLayoutStrategy(this);
|
|
|
|
if (temp) {
|
|
delete mTableLayoutStrategy;
|
|
mTableLayoutStrategy = temp;
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
void
|
|
nsTableFrame::AppendFrames(ChildListID aListID,
|
|
nsFrameList& aFrameList)
|
|
{
|
|
NS_ASSERTION(aListID == kPrincipalList || aListID == kColGroupList,
|
|
"unexpected child list");
|
|
|
|
// Because we actually have two child lists, one for col group frames and one
|
|
// for everything else, we need to look at each frame individually
|
|
// XXX The frame construction code should be separating out child frames
|
|
// based on the type, bug 343048.
|
|
while (!aFrameList.IsEmpty()) {
|
|
nsIFrame* f = aFrameList.FirstChild();
|
|
aFrameList.RemoveFrame(f);
|
|
|
|
// See what kind of frame we have
|
|
const nsStyleDisplay* display = f->StyleDisplay();
|
|
|
|
if (NS_STYLE_DISPLAY_TABLE_COLUMN_GROUP == display->mDisplay) {
|
|
if (MOZ_UNLIKELY(GetPrevInFlow())) {
|
|
nsFrameList colgroupFrame(f, f);
|
|
auto firstInFlow = static_cast<nsTableFrame*>(FirstInFlow());
|
|
firstInFlow->AppendFrames(aListID, colgroupFrame);
|
|
continue;
|
|
}
|
|
nsTableColGroupFrame* lastColGroup =
|
|
nsTableColGroupFrame::GetLastRealColGroup(this);
|
|
int32_t startColIndex = (lastColGroup)
|
|
? lastColGroup->GetStartColumnIndex() + lastColGroup->GetColCount() : 0;
|
|
mColGroups.InsertFrame(this, lastColGroup, f);
|
|
// Insert the colgroup and its cols into the table
|
|
InsertColGroups(startColIndex,
|
|
nsFrameList::Slice(mColGroups, f, f->GetNextSibling()));
|
|
} else if (IsRowGroup(display->mDisplay)) {
|
|
DrainSelfOverflowList(); // ensure the last frame is in mFrames
|
|
// Append the new row group frame to the sibling chain
|
|
mFrames.AppendFrame(nullptr, f);
|
|
|
|
// insert the row group and its rows into the table
|
|
InsertRowGroups(nsFrameList::Slice(mFrames, f, nullptr));
|
|
} else {
|
|
// Nothing special to do, just add the frame to our child list
|
|
NS_NOTREACHED("How did we get here? Frame construction screwed up");
|
|
mFrames.AppendFrame(nullptr, f);
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
#ifdef DEBUG_TABLE_CELLMAP
|
|
printf("=== TableFrame::AppendFrames\n");
|
|
Dump(true, true, true);
|
|
#endif
|
|
PresContext()->PresShell()->FrameNeedsReflow(this, nsIPresShell::eTreeChange,
|
|
NS_FRAME_HAS_DIRTY_CHILDREN);
|
|
SetGeometryDirty();
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
// Needs to be at file scope or ArrayLength fails to compile.
|
|
struct ChildListInsertions {
|
|
nsIFrame::ChildListID mID;
|
|
nsFrameList mList;
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
void
|
|
nsTableFrame::InsertFrames(ChildListID aListID,
|
|
nsIFrame* aPrevFrame,
|
|
nsFrameList& aFrameList)
|
|
{
|
|
// The frames in aFrameList can be a mix of row group frames and col group
|
|
// frames. The problem is that they should go in separate child lists so
|
|
// we need to deal with that here...
|
|
// XXX The frame construction code should be separating out child frames
|
|
// based on the type, bug 343048.
|
|
|
|
NS_ASSERTION(!aPrevFrame || aPrevFrame->GetParent() == this,
|
|
"inserting after sibling frame with different parent");
|
|
|
|
if ((aPrevFrame && !aPrevFrame->GetNextSibling()) ||
|
|
(!aPrevFrame && GetChildList(aListID).IsEmpty())) {
|
|
// Treat this like an append; still a workaround for bug 343048.
|
|
AppendFrames(aListID, aFrameList);
|
|
return;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
// Collect ColGroupFrames into a separate list and insert those separately
|
|
// from the other frames (bug 759249).
|
|
ChildListInsertions insertions[2]; // ColGroup, other
|
|
const nsStyleDisplay* display = aFrameList.FirstChild()->StyleDisplay();
|
|
nsFrameList::FrameLinkEnumerator e(aFrameList);
|
|
for (; !aFrameList.IsEmpty(); e.Next()) {
|
|
nsIFrame* next = e.NextFrame();
|
|
if (!next || next->StyleDisplay()->mDisplay != display->mDisplay) {
|
|
nsFrameList head = aFrameList.ExtractHead(e);
|
|
if (display->mDisplay == NS_STYLE_DISPLAY_TABLE_COLUMN_GROUP) {
|
|
insertions[0].mID = kColGroupList;
|
|
insertions[0].mList.AppendFrames(nullptr, head);
|
|
} else {
|
|
insertions[1].mID = kPrincipalList;
|
|
insertions[1].mList.AppendFrames(nullptr, head);
|
|
}
|
|
if (!next) {
|
|
break;
|
|
}
|
|
display = next->StyleDisplay();
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
for (uint32_t i = 0; i < ArrayLength(insertions); ++i) {
|
|
// We pass aPrevFrame for both ColGroup and other frames since
|
|
// HomogenousInsertFrames will only use it if it's a suitable
|
|
// prev-sibling for the frames in the frame list.
|
|
if (!insertions[i].mList.IsEmpty()) {
|
|
HomogenousInsertFrames(insertions[i].mID, aPrevFrame,
|
|
insertions[i].mList);
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
void
|
|
nsTableFrame::HomogenousInsertFrames(ChildListID aListID,
|
|
nsIFrame* aPrevFrame,
|
|
nsFrameList& aFrameList)
|
|
{
|
|
// See what kind of frame we have
|
|
const nsStyleDisplay* display = aFrameList.FirstChild()->StyleDisplay();
|
|
bool isColGroup = NS_STYLE_DISPLAY_TABLE_COLUMN_GROUP == display->mDisplay;
|
|
#ifdef DEBUG
|
|
// Verify that either all siblings have display:table-column-group, or they
|
|
// all have display values different from table-column-group.
|
|
for (nsIFrame* frame : aFrameList) {
|
|
auto nextDisplay = frame->StyleDisplay()->mDisplay;
|
|
MOZ_ASSERT(isColGroup ==
|
|
(nextDisplay == NS_STYLE_DISPLAY_TABLE_COLUMN_GROUP),
|
|
"heterogenous childlist");
|
|
}
|
|
#endif
|
|
if (MOZ_UNLIKELY(isColGroup && GetPrevInFlow())) {
|
|
auto firstInFlow = static_cast<nsTableFrame*>(FirstInFlow());
|
|
firstInFlow->AppendFrames(aListID, aFrameList);
|
|
return;
|
|
}
|
|
if (aPrevFrame) {
|
|
const nsStyleDisplay* prevDisplay = aPrevFrame->StyleDisplay();
|
|
// Make sure they belong on the same frame list
|
|
if ((display->mDisplay == NS_STYLE_DISPLAY_TABLE_COLUMN_GROUP) !=
|
|
(prevDisplay->mDisplay == NS_STYLE_DISPLAY_TABLE_COLUMN_GROUP)) {
|
|
// the previous frame is not valid, see comment at ::AppendFrames
|
|
// XXXbz Using content indices here means XBL will get screwed
|
|
// over... Oh, well.
|
|
nsIFrame* pseudoFrame = aFrameList.FirstChild();
|
|
nsIContent* parentContent = GetContent();
|
|
nsIContent* content;
|
|
aPrevFrame = nullptr;
|
|
while (pseudoFrame && (parentContent ==
|
|
(content = pseudoFrame->GetContent()))) {
|
|
pseudoFrame = pseudoFrame->GetFirstPrincipalChild();
|
|
}
|
|
nsCOMPtr<nsIContent> container = content->GetParent();
|
|
if (MOZ_LIKELY(container)) { // XXX need this null-check, see bug 411823.
|
|
int32_t newIndex = container->IndexOf(content);
|
|
nsIFrame* kidFrame;
|
|
nsTableColGroupFrame* lastColGroup;
|
|
if (isColGroup) {
|
|
kidFrame = mColGroups.FirstChild();
|
|
lastColGroup = nsTableColGroupFrame::GetLastRealColGroup(this);
|
|
}
|
|
else {
|
|
kidFrame = mFrames.FirstChild();
|
|
}
|
|
// Important: need to start at a value smaller than all valid indices
|
|
int32_t lastIndex = -1;
|
|
while (kidFrame) {
|
|
if (isColGroup) {
|
|
if (kidFrame == lastColGroup) {
|
|
aPrevFrame = kidFrame; // there is no real colgroup after this one
|
|
break;
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
pseudoFrame = kidFrame;
|
|
while (pseudoFrame && (parentContent ==
|
|
(content = pseudoFrame->GetContent()))) {
|
|
pseudoFrame = pseudoFrame->GetFirstPrincipalChild();
|
|
}
|
|
int32_t index = container->IndexOf(content);
|
|
if (index > lastIndex && index < newIndex) {
|
|
lastIndex = index;
|
|
aPrevFrame = kidFrame;
|
|
}
|
|
kidFrame = kidFrame->GetNextSibling();
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
if (NS_STYLE_DISPLAY_TABLE_COLUMN_GROUP == display->mDisplay) {
|
|
NS_ASSERTION(aListID == kColGroupList, "unexpected child list");
|
|
// Insert the column group frames
|
|
const nsFrameList::Slice& newColgroups =
|
|
mColGroups.InsertFrames(this, aPrevFrame, aFrameList);
|
|
// find the starting col index for the first new col group
|
|
int32_t startColIndex = 0;
|
|
if (aPrevFrame) {
|
|
nsTableColGroupFrame* prevColGroup =
|
|
(nsTableColGroupFrame*)GetFrameAtOrBefore(this, aPrevFrame,
|
|
nsGkAtoms::tableColGroupFrame);
|
|
if (prevColGroup) {
|
|
startColIndex = prevColGroup->GetStartColumnIndex() + prevColGroup->GetColCount();
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
InsertColGroups(startColIndex, newColgroups);
|
|
} else if (IsRowGroup(display->mDisplay)) {
|
|
NS_ASSERTION(aListID == kPrincipalList, "unexpected child list");
|
|
DrainSelfOverflowList(); // ensure aPrevFrame is in mFrames
|
|
// Insert the frames in the sibling chain
|
|
const nsFrameList::Slice& newRowGroups =
|
|
mFrames.InsertFrames(nullptr, aPrevFrame, aFrameList);
|
|
|
|
InsertRowGroups(newRowGroups);
|
|
} else {
|
|
NS_ASSERTION(aListID == kPrincipalList, "unexpected child list");
|
|
NS_NOTREACHED("How did we even get here?");
|
|
// Just insert the frame and don't worry about reflowing it
|
|
mFrames.InsertFrames(nullptr, aPrevFrame, aFrameList);
|
|
return;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
PresContext()->PresShell()->FrameNeedsReflow(this, nsIPresShell::eTreeChange,
|
|
NS_FRAME_HAS_DIRTY_CHILDREN);
|
|
SetGeometryDirty();
|
|
#ifdef DEBUG_TABLE_CELLMAP
|
|
printf("=== TableFrame::InsertFrames\n");
|
|
Dump(true, true, true);
|
|
#endif
|
|
return;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
void
|
|
nsTableFrame::DoRemoveFrame(ChildListID aListID,
|
|
nsIFrame* aOldFrame)
|
|
{
|
|
if (aListID == kColGroupList) {
|
|
nsIFrame* nextColGroupFrame = aOldFrame->GetNextSibling();
|
|
nsTableColGroupFrame* colGroup = (nsTableColGroupFrame*)aOldFrame;
|
|
int32_t firstColIndex = colGroup->GetStartColumnIndex();
|
|
int32_t lastColIndex = firstColIndex + colGroup->GetColCount() - 1;
|
|
mColGroups.DestroyFrame(aOldFrame);
|
|
nsTableColGroupFrame::ResetColIndices(nextColGroupFrame, firstColIndex);
|
|
// remove the cols from the table
|
|
int32_t colIdx;
|
|
for (colIdx = lastColIndex; colIdx >= firstColIndex; colIdx--) {
|
|
nsTableColFrame* colFrame = mColFrames.SafeElementAt(colIdx);
|
|
if (colFrame) {
|
|
RemoveCol(colGroup, colIdx, true, false);
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
int32_t numAnonymousColsToAdd = GetColCount() - mColFrames.Length();
|
|
if (numAnonymousColsToAdd > 0) {
|
|
// this sets the child list, updates the col cache and cell map
|
|
AppendAnonymousColFrames(numAnonymousColsToAdd);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
} else {
|
|
NS_ASSERTION(aListID == kPrincipalList, "unexpected child list");
|
|
nsTableRowGroupFrame* rgFrame =
|
|
static_cast<nsTableRowGroupFrame*>(aOldFrame);
|
|
// remove the row group from the cell map
|
|
nsTableCellMap* cellMap = GetCellMap();
|
|
if (cellMap) {
|
|
cellMap->RemoveGroupCellMap(rgFrame);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
// remove the row group frame from the sibling chain
|
|
mFrames.DestroyFrame(aOldFrame);
|
|
|
|
// the removal of a row group changes the cellmap, the columns might change
|
|
if (cellMap) {
|
|
cellMap->Synchronize(this);
|
|
// Create an empty slice
|
|
ResetRowIndices(nsFrameList::Slice(mFrames, nullptr, nullptr));
|
|
TableArea damageArea;
|
|
cellMap->RebuildConsideringCells(nullptr, nullptr, 0, 0, false, damageArea);
|
|
|
|
static_cast<nsTableFrame*>(FirstInFlow())->MatchCellMapToColCache(cellMap);
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
void
|
|
nsTableFrame::RemoveFrame(ChildListID aListID,
|
|
nsIFrame* aOldFrame)
|
|
{
|
|
NS_ASSERTION(aListID == kColGroupList ||
|
|
NS_STYLE_DISPLAY_TABLE_COLUMN_GROUP !=
|
|
aOldFrame->StyleDisplay()->mDisplay,
|
|
"Wrong list name; use kColGroupList iff colgroup");
|
|
nsIPresShell* shell = PresContext()->PresShell();
|
|
nsTableFrame* lastParent = nullptr;
|
|
while (aOldFrame) {
|
|
nsIFrame* oldFrameNextContinuation = aOldFrame->GetNextContinuation();
|
|
nsTableFrame* parent = static_cast<nsTableFrame*>(aOldFrame->GetParent());
|
|
if (parent != lastParent) {
|
|
parent->DrainSelfOverflowList();
|
|
}
|
|
parent->DoRemoveFrame(aListID, aOldFrame);
|
|
aOldFrame = oldFrameNextContinuation;
|
|
if (parent != lastParent) {
|
|
// for now, just bail and recalc all of the collapsing borders
|
|
// as the cellmap changes we need to recalc
|
|
if (parent->IsBorderCollapse()) {
|
|
parent->SetFullBCDamageArea();
|
|
}
|
|
parent->SetGeometryDirty();
|
|
shell->FrameNeedsReflow(parent, nsIPresShell::eTreeChange,
|
|
NS_FRAME_HAS_DIRTY_CHILDREN);
|
|
lastParent = parent;
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
#ifdef DEBUG_TABLE_CELLMAP
|
|
printf("=== TableFrame::RemoveFrame\n");
|
|
Dump(true, true, true);
|
|
#endif
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/* virtual */ nsMargin
|
|
nsTableFrame::GetUsedBorder() const
|
|
{
|
|
if (!IsBorderCollapse())
|
|
return nsContainerFrame::GetUsedBorder();
|
|
|
|
WritingMode wm = GetWritingMode();
|
|
return GetIncludedOuterBCBorder(wm).GetPhysicalMargin(wm);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/* virtual */ nsMargin
|
|
nsTableFrame::GetUsedPadding() const
|
|
{
|
|
if (!IsBorderCollapse())
|
|
return nsContainerFrame::GetUsedPadding();
|
|
|
|
return nsMargin(0,0,0,0);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/* virtual */ nsMargin
|
|
nsTableFrame::GetUsedMargin() const
|
|
{
|
|
// The margin is inherited to the outer table frame via
|
|
// the ::-moz-table-outer rule in ua.css.
|
|
return nsMargin(0, 0, 0, 0);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
NS_DECLARE_FRAME_PROPERTY(TableBCProperty, DeleteValue<BCPropertyData>)
|
|
|
|
BCPropertyData*
|
|
nsTableFrame::GetBCProperty(bool aCreateIfNecessary) const
|
|
{
|
|
FrameProperties props = Properties();
|
|
BCPropertyData* value = static_cast<BCPropertyData*>
|
|
(props.Get(TableBCProperty()));
|
|
if (!value && aCreateIfNecessary) {
|
|
value = new BCPropertyData();
|
|
props.Set(TableBCProperty(), value);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
return value;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
static void
|
|
DivideBCBorderSize(BCPixelSize aPixelSize,
|
|
BCPixelSize& aSmallHalf,
|
|
BCPixelSize& aLargeHalf)
|
|
{
|
|
aSmallHalf = aPixelSize / 2;
|
|
aLargeHalf = aPixelSize - aSmallHalf;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
LogicalMargin
|
|
nsTableFrame::GetOuterBCBorder(const WritingMode aWM) const
|
|
{
|
|
if (NeedToCalcBCBorders()) {
|
|
const_cast<nsTableFrame*>(this)->CalcBCBorders();
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
int32_t p2t = nsPresContext::AppUnitsPerCSSPixel();
|
|
BCPropertyData* propData = GetBCProperty();
|
|
if (propData) {
|
|
return LogicalMargin(aWM,
|
|
BC_BORDER_START_HALF_COORD(p2t, propData->mBStartBorderWidth),
|
|
BC_BORDER_END_HALF_COORD(p2t, propData->mIEndBorderWidth),
|
|
BC_BORDER_END_HALF_COORD(p2t, propData->mBEndBorderWidth),
|
|
BC_BORDER_START_HALF_COORD(p2t, propData->mIStartBorderWidth));
|
|
}
|
|
return LogicalMargin(aWM);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
LogicalMargin
|
|
nsTableFrame::GetIncludedOuterBCBorder(const WritingMode aWM) const
|
|
{
|
|
if (NeedToCalcBCBorders()) {
|
|
const_cast<nsTableFrame*>(this)->CalcBCBorders();
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
int32_t p2t = nsPresContext::AppUnitsPerCSSPixel();
|
|
BCPropertyData* propData = GetBCProperty();
|
|
if (propData) {
|
|
return LogicalMargin(aWM,
|
|
BC_BORDER_START_HALF_COORD(p2t, propData->mBStartBorderWidth),
|
|
BC_BORDER_END_HALF_COORD(p2t, propData->mIEndCellBorderWidth),
|
|
BC_BORDER_END_HALF_COORD(p2t, propData->mBEndBorderWidth),
|
|
BC_BORDER_START_HALF_COORD(p2t, propData->mIStartCellBorderWidth));
|
|
}
|
|
return LogicalMargin(aWM);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
LogicalMargin
|
|
nsTableFrame::GetExcludedOuterBCBorder(const WritingMode aWM) const
|
|
{
|
|
return GetOuterBCBorder(aWM) - GetIncludedOuterBCBorder(aWM);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
static LogicalMargin
|
|
GetSeparateModelBorderPadding(const WritingMode aWM,
|
|
const nsHTMLReflowState* aReflowState,
|
|
nsStyleContext* aStyleContext)
|
|
{
|
|
// XXXbz Either we _do_ have a reflow state and then we can use its
|
|
// mComputedBorderPadding or we don't and then we get the padding
|
|
// wrong!
|
|
const nsStyleBorder* border = aStyleContext->StyleBorder();
|
|
LogicalMargin borderPadding(aWM, border->GetComputedBorder());
|
|
if (aReflowState) {
|
|
borderPadding += aReflowState->ComputedLogicalPadding();
|
|
}
|
|
return borderPadding;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
LogicalMargin
|
|
nsTableFrame::GetChildAreaOffset(const WritingMode aWM,
|
|
const nsHTMLReflowState* aReflowState) const
|
|
{
|
|
return IsBorderCollapse() ? GetIncludedOuterBCBorder(aWM) :
|
|
GetSeparateModelBorderPadding(aWM, aReflowState, mStyleContext);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
void
|
|
nsTableFrame::InitChildReflowState(nsHTMLReflowState& aReflowState)
|
|
{
|
|
nsMargin collapseBorder;
|
|
nsMargin padding(0,0,0,0);
|
|
nsMargin* pCollapseBorder = nullptr;
|
|
nsPresContext* presContext = PresContext();
|
|
if (IsBorderCollapse()) {
|
|
nsTableRowGroupFrame* rgFrame =
|
|
static_cast<nsTableRowGroupFrame*>(aReflowState.frame);
|
|
WritingMode wm = GetWritingMode();
|
|
LogicalMargin border = rgFrame->GetBCBorderWidth(wm);
|
|
collapseBorder = border.GetPhysicalMargin(wm);
|
|
pCollapseBorder = &collapseBorder;
|
|
}
|
|
aReflowState.Init(presContext, nullptr, pCollapseBorder, &padding);
|
|
|
|
NS_ASSERTION(!mBits.mResizedColumns ||
|
|
!aReflowState.parentReflowState->mFlags.mSpecialBSizeReflow,
|
|
"should not resize columns on special bsize reflow");
|
|
if (mBits.mResizedColumns) {
|
|
aReflowState.SetIResize(true);
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
// Position and size aKidFrame and update our reflow state. The origin of
|
|
// aKidRect is relative to the upper-left origin of our frame
|
|
void
|
|
nsTableFrame::PlaceChild(nsTableReflowState& aReflowState,
|
|
nsIFrame* aKidFrame,
|
|
nsPoint aKidPosition,
|
|
nsHTMLReflowMetrics& aKidDesiredSize,
|
|
const nsRect& aOriginalKidRect,
|
|
const nsRect& aOriginalKidVisualOverflow)
|
|
{
|
|
WritingMode wm = aReflowState.reflowState.GetWritingMode();
|
|
bool isFirstReflow =
|
|
aKidFrame->HasAnyStateBits(NS_FRAME_FIRST_REFLOW);
|
|
|
|
// Place and size the child
|
|
FinishReflowChild(aKidFrame, PresContext(), aKidDesiredSize, nullptr,
|
|
aKidPosition.x, aKidPosition.y, 0);
|
|
|
|
InvalidateTableFrame(aKidFrame, aOriginalKidRect, aOriginalKidVisualOverflow,
|
|
isFirstReflow);
|
|
|
|
// Adjust the running block-offset
|
|
aReflowState.bCoord += aKidDesiredSize.BSize(wm);
|
|
|
|
// If our bsize is constrained, then update the available bsize
|
|
if (NS_UNCONSTRAINEDSIZE != aReflowState.availSize.BSize(wm)) {
|
|
aReflowState.availSize.BSize(wm) -= aKidDesiredSize.BSize(wm);
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
void
|
|
nsTableFrame::OrderRowGroups(RowGroupArray& aChildren,
|
|
nsTableRowGroupFrame** aHead,
|
|
nsTableRowGroupFrame** aFoot) const
|
|
{
|
|
aChildren.Clear();
|
|
nsTableRowGroupFrame* head = nullptr;
|
|
nsTableRowGroupFrame* foot = nullptr;
|
|
|
|
nsIFrame* kidFrame = mFrames.FirstChild();
|
|
while (kidFrame) {
|
|
const nsStyleDisplay* kidDisplay = kidFrame->StyleDisplay();
|
|
nsTableRowGroupFrame* rowGroup =
|
|
static_cast<nsTableRowGroupFrame*>(kidFrame);
|
|
|
|
switch (kidDisplay->mDisplay) {
|
|
case NS_STYLE_DISPLAY_TABLE_HEADER_GROUP:
|
|
if (head) { // treat additional thead like tbody
|
|
aChildren.AppendElement(rowGroup);
|
|
}
|
|
else {
|
|
head = rowGroup;
|
|
}
|
|
break;
|
|
case NS_STYLE_DISPLAY_TABLE_FOOTER_GROUP:
|
|
if (foot) { // treat additional tfoot like tbody
|
|
aChildren.AppendElement(rowGroup);
|
|
}
|
|
else {
|
|
foot = rowGroup;
|
|
}
|
|
break;
|
|
case NS_STYLE_DISPLAY_TABLE_ROW_GROUP:
|
|
aChildren.AppendElement(rowGroup);
|
|
break;
|
|
default:
|
|
NS_NOTREACHED("How did this produce an nsTableRowGroupFrame?");
|
|
// Just ignore it
|
|
break;
|
|
}
|
|
// Get the next sibling but skip it if it's also the next-in-flow, since
|
|
// a next-in-flow will not be part of the current table.
|
|
while (kidFrame) {
|
|
nsIFrame* nif = kidFrame->GetNextInFlow();
|
|
kidFrame = kidFrame->GetNextSibling();
|
|
if (kidFrame != nif)
|
|
break;
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
// put the thead first
|
|
if (head) {
|
|
aChildren.InsertElementAt(0, head);
|
|
}
|
|
if (aHead)
|
|
*aHead = head;
|
|
// put the tfoot after the last tbody
|
|
if (foot) {
|
|
aChildren.AppendElement(foot);
|
|
}
|
|
if (aFoot)
|
|
*aFoot = foot;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
nsTableRowGroupFrame*
|
|
nsTableFrame::GetTHead() const
|
|
{
|
|
nsIFrame* kidFrame = mFrames.FirstChild();
|
|
while (kidFrame) {
|
|
if (kidFrame->StyleDisplay()->mDisplay ==
|
|
NS_STYLE_DISPLAY_TABLE_HEADER_GROUP) {
|
|
return static_cast<nsTableRowGroupFrame*>(kidFrame);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
// Get the next sibling but skip it if it's also the next-in-flow, since
|
|
// a next-in-flow will not be part of the current table.
|
|
while (kidFrame) {
|
|
nsIFrame* nif = kidFrame->GetNextInFlow();
|
|
kidFrame = kidFrame->GetNextSibling();
|
|
if (kidFrame != nif)
|
|
break;
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
return nullptr;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
nsTableRowGroupFrame*
|
|
nsTableFrame::GetTFoot() const
|
|
{
|
|
nsIFrame* kidFrame = mFrames.FirstChild();
|
|
while (kidFrame) {
|
|
if (kidFrame->StyleDisplay()->mDisplay ==
|
|
NS_STYLE_DISPLAY_TABLE_FOOTER_GROUP) {
|
|
return static_cast<nsTableRowGroupFrame*>(kidFrame);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
// Get the next sibling but skip it if it's also the next-in-flow, since
|
|
// a next-in-flow will not be part of the current table.
|
|
while (kidFrame) {
|
|
nsIFrame* nif = kidFrame->GetNextInFlow();
|
|
kidFrame = kidFrame->GetNextSibling();
|
|
if (kidFrame != nif)
|
|
break;
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
return nullptr;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
static bool
|
|
IsRepeatable(nscoord aFrameHeight, nscoord aPageHeight)
|
|
{
|
|
return aFrameHeight < (aPageHeight / 4);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
nsresult
|
|
nsTableFrame::SetupHeaderFooterChild(const nsTableReflowState& aReflowState,
|
|
nsTableRowGroupFrame* aFrame,
|
|
nscoord* aDesiredHeight)
|
|
{
|
|
nsPresContext* presContext = PresContext();
|
|
nscoord pageHeight = presContext->GetPageSize().height;
|
|
|
|
// Reflow the child with unconstrained height
|
|
WritingMode wm = aFrame->GetWritingMode();
|
|
LogicalSize availSize = aReflowState.reflowState.AvailableSize(wm);
|
|
|
|
nsSize containerSize = availSize.GetPhysicalSize(wm);
|
|
// XXX check for containerSize.* == NS_UNCONSTRAINEDSIZE
|
|
|
|
availSize.BSize(wm) = NS_UNCONSTRAINEDSIZE;
|
|
nsHTMLReflowState kidReflowState(presContext, aReflowState.reflowState,
|
|
aFrame, availSize, nullptr,
|
|
nsHTMLReflowState::CALLER_WILL_INIT);
|
|
InitChildReflowState(kidReflowState);
|
|
kidReflowState.mFlags.mIsTopOfPage = true;
|
|
nsHTMLReflowMetrics desiredSize(aReflowState.reflowState);
|
|
desiredSize.ClearSize();
|
|
nsReflowStatus status;
|
|
ReflowChild(aFrame, presContext, desiredSize, kidReflowState,
|
|
wm, LogicalPoint(wm, aReflowState.iCoord, aReflowState.bCoord),
|
|
containerSize, 0, status);
|
|
// The child will be reflowed again "for real" so no need to place it now
|
|
|
|
aFrame->SetRepeatable(IsRepeatable(desiredSize.Height(), pageHeight));
|
|
*aDesiredHeight = desiredSize.Height();
|
|
return NS_OK;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
void
|
|
nsTableFrame::PlaceRepeatedFooter(nsTableReflowState& aReflowState,
|
|
nsTableRowGroupFrame *aTfoot,
|
|
nscoord aFooterHeight)
|
|
{
|
|
nsPresContext* presContext = PresContext();
|
|
WritingMode wm = aTfoot->GetWritingMode();
|
|
LogicalSize kidAvailSize = aReflowState.availSize;
|
|
|
|
nsSize containerSize = kidAvailSize.GetPhysicalSize(wm);
|
|
// XXX check for containerSize.* == NS_UNCONSTRAINEDSIZE
|
|
|
|
kidAvailSize.BSize(wm) = aFooterHeight;
|
|
nsHTMLReflowState footerReflowState(presContext,
|
|
aReflowState.reflowState,
|
|
aTfoot, kidAvailSize,
|
|
nullptr,
|
|
nsHTMLReflowState::CALLER_WILL_INIT);
|
|
InitChildReflowState(footerReflowState);
|
|
aReflowState.bCoord += GetRowSpacing(GetRowCount());
|
|
|
|
nsRect origTfootRect = aTfoot->GetRect();
|
|
nsRect origTfootVisualOverflow = aTfoot->GetVisualOverflowRect();
|
|
|
|
nsReflowStatus footerStatus;
|
|
nsHTMLReflowMetrics desiredSize(aReflowState.reflowState);
|
|
desiredSize.ClearSize();
|
|
LogicalPoint kidPosition(wm, aReflowState.iCoord, aReflowState.bCoord);
|
|
ReflowChild(aTfoot, presContext, desiredSize, footerReflowState,
|
|
wm, kidPosition, containerSize, 0, footerStatus);
|
|
footerReflowState.ApplyRelativePositioning(&kidPosition, containerSize);
|
|
|
|
PlaceChild(aReflowState, aTfoot,
|
|
// We subtract desiredSize.PhysicalSize() from containerSize here
|
|
// to account for the fact that in RTL modes, the origin is
|
|
// on the right-hand side so we're not simply converting a
|
|
// point, we're also swapping the child's origin side.
|
|
kidPosition.GetPhysicalPoint(wm, containerSize -
|
|
desiredSize.PhysicalSize()),
|
|
desiredSize, origTfootRect, origTfootVisualOverflow);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
// Reflow the children based on the avail size and reason in aReflowState
|
|
// update aReflowMetrics a aStatus
|
|
void
|
|
nsTableFrame::ReflowChildren(nsTableReflowState& aReflowState,
|
|
nsReflowStatus& aStatus,
|
|
nsIFrame*& aLastChildReflowed,
|
|
nsOverflowAreas& aOverflowAreas)
|
|
{
|
|
aStatus = NS_FRAME_COMPLETE;
|
|
aLastChildReflowed = nullptr;
|
|
|
|
nsIFrame* prevKidFrame = nullptr;
|
|
WritingMode wm = aReflowState.reflowState.GetWritingMode();
|
|
NS_WARN_IF_FALSE(wm.IsVertical() || NS_UNCONSTRAINEDSIZE !=
|
|
aReflowState.reflowState.ComputedWidth(),
|
|
"shouldn't have unconstrained width in horizontal mode");
|
|
nsSize containerSize =
|
|
aReflowState.reflowState.ComputedSizeAsContainerIfConstrained();
|
|
|
|
nsPresContext* presContext = PresContext();
|
|
// XXXldb Should we be checking constrained height instead?
|
|
// tables are not able to pull back children from its next inflow, so even
|
|
// under paginated contexts tables are should not paginate if they are inside
|
|
// column set
|
|
bool isPaginated = presContext->IsPaginated() &&
|
|
NS_UNCONSTRAINEDSIZE != aReflowState.availSize.BSize(wm) &&
|
|
aReflowState.reflowState.mFlags.mTableIsSplittable;
|
|
|
|
aOverflowAreas.Clear();
|
|
|
|
bool reflowAllKids = aReflowState.reflowState.ShouldReflowAllKids() ||
|
|
mBits.mResizedColumns ||
|
|
IsGeometryDirty();
|
|
|
|
RowGroupArray rowGroups;
|
|
nsTableRowGroupFrame *thead, *tfoot;
|
|
OrderRowGroups(rowGroups, &thead, &tfoot);
|
|
bool pageBreak = false;
|
|
nscoord footerHeight = 0;
|
|
|
|
// Determine the repeatablility of headers and footers, and also the desired
|
|
// height of any repeatable footer.
|
|
// The repeatability of headers on continued tables is handled
|
|
// when they are created in nsCSSFrameConstructor::CreateContinuingTableFrame.
|
|
// We handle the repeatability of footers again here because we need to
|
|
// determine the footer's height anyway. We could perhaps optimize by
|
|
// using the footer's prev-in-flow's height instead of reflowing it again,
|
|
// but there's no real need.
|
|
if (isPaginated) {
|
|
if (thead && !GetPrevInFlow()) {
|
|
nscoord desiredHeight;
|
|
nsresult rv = SetupHeaderFooterChild(aReflowState, thead, &desiredHeight);
|
|
if (NS_FAILED(rv))
|
|
return;
|
|
}
|
|
if (tfoot) {
|
|
nsresult rv = SetupHeaderFooterChild(aReflowState, tfoot, &footerHeight);
|
|
if (NS_FAILED(rv))
|
|
return;
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
// if the child is a tbody in paginated mode reduce the height by a repeated footer
|
|
bool allowRepeatedFooter = false;
|
|
for (size_t childX = 0; childX < rowGroups.Length(); childX++) {
|
|
nsIFrame* kidFrame = rowGroups[childX];
|
|
nsTableRowGroupFrame* rowGroupFrame = rowGroups[childX];
|
|
nscoord cellSpacingB = GetRowSpacing(rowGroupFrame->GetStartRowIndex()+
|
|
rowGroupFrame->GetRowCount());
|
|
// Get the frame state bits
|
|
// See if we should only reflow the dirty child frames
|
|
if (reflowAllKids ||
|
|
NS_SUBTREE_DIRTY(kidFrame) ||
|
|
(aReflowState.reflowState.mFlags.mSpecialBSizeReflow &&
|
|
(isPaginated || kidFrame->HasAnyStateBits(
|
|
NS_FRAME_CONTAINS_RELATIVE_BSIZE)))) {
|
|
if (pageBreak) {
|
|
if (allowRepeatedFooter) {
|
|
PlaceRepeatedFooter(aReflowState, tfoot, footerHeight);
|
|
}
|
|
else if (tfoot && tfoot->IsRepeatable()) {
|
|
tfoot->SetRepeatable(false);
|
|
}
|
|
PushChildren(rowGroups, childX);
|
|
aStatus = NS_FRAME_NOT_COMPLETE;
|
|
break;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
LogicalSize kidAvailSize(aReflowState.availSize);
|
|
allowRepeatedFooter = false;
|
|
if (isPaginated && (NS_UNCONSTRAINEDSIZE != kidAvailSize.BSize(wm))) {
|
|
nsTableRowGroupFrame* kidRG =
|
|
static_cast<nsTableRowGroupFrame*>(kidFrame);
|
|
if (kidRG != thead && kidRG != tfoot && tfoot && tfoot->IsRepeatable()) {
|
|
// the child is a tbody and there is a repeatable footer
|
|
NS_ASSERTION(tfoot == rowGroups[rowGroups.Length() - 1], "Missing footer!");
|
|
if (footerHeight + cellSpacingB < kidAvailSize.BSize(wm)) {
|
|
allowRepeatedFooter = true;
|
|
kidAvailSize.BSize(wm) -= footerHeight + cellSpacingB;
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
nsRect oldKidRect = kidFrame->GetRect();
|
|
nsRect oldKidVisualOverflow = kidFrame->GetVisualOverflowRect();
|
|
|
|
nsHTMLReflowMetrics desiredSize(aReflowState.reflowState);
|
|
desiredSize.ClearSize();
|
|
|
|
// Reflow the child into the available space
|
|
nsHTMLReflowState kidReflowState(presContext, aReflowState.reflowState,
|
|
kidFrame,
|
|
kidAvailSize,
|
|
nullptr,
|
|
nsHTMLReflowState::CALLER_WILL_INIT);
|
|
InitChildReflowState(kidReflowState);
|
|
|
|
// If this isn't the first row group, and the previous row group has a
|
|
// nonzero YMost, then we can't be at the top of the page.
|
|
// We ignore a repeated head row group in this check to avoid causing
|
|
// infinite loops in some circumstances - see bug 344883.
|
|
if (childX > ((thead && IsRepeatedFrame(thead)) ? 1u : 0u) &&
|
|
(rowGroups[childX - 1]->GetNormalRect().YMost() > 0)) {
|
|
kidReflowState.mFlags.mIsTopOfPage = false;
|
|
}
|
|
aReflowState.bCoord += cellSpacingB;
|
|
if (NS_UNCONSTRAINEDSIZE != aReflowState.availSize.BSize(wm)) {
|
|
aReflowState.availSize.BSize(wm) -= cellSpacingB;
|
|
}
|
|
// record the presence of a next in flow, it might get destroyed so we
|
|
// need to reorder the row group array
|
|
bool reorder = false;
|
|
if (kidFrame->GetNextInFlow())
|
|
reorder = true;
|
|
|
|
LogicalPoint kidPosition(wm, aReflowState.iCoord, aReflowState.bCoord);
|
|
ReflowChild(kidFrame, presContext, desiredSize, kidReflowState,
|
|
wm, kidPosition, containerSize, 0, aStatus);
|
|
kidReflowState.ApplyRelativePositioning(&kidPosition, containerSize);
|
|
|
|
if (reorder) {
|
|
// reorder row groups the reflow may have changed the nextinflows
|
|
OrderRowGroups(rowGroups, &thead, &tfoot);
|
|
childX = rowGroups.IndexOf(kidFrame);
|
|
if (childX == RowGroupArray::NoIndex) {
|
|
// XXXbz can this happen?
|
|
childX = rowGroups.Length();
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
if (isPaginated && !NS_FRAME_IS_FULLY_COMPLETE(aStatus) &&
|
|
ShouldAvoidBreakInside(aReflowState.reflowState)) {
|
|
aStatus = NS_INLINE_LINE_BREAK_BEFORE();
|
|
break;
|
|
}
|
|
// see if the rowgroup did not fit on this page might be pushed on
|
|
// the next page
|
|
if (isPaginated &&
|
|
(NS_INLINE_IS_BREAK_BEFORE(aStatus) ||
|
|
(NS_FRAME_IS_COMPLETE(aStatus) &&
|
|
(NS_UNCONSTRAINEDSIZE != kidReflowState.AvailableHeight()) &&
|
|
kidReflowState.AvailableHeight() < desiredSize.Height()))) {
|
|
if (ShouldAvoidBreakInside(aReflowState.reflowState)) {
|
|
aStatus = NS_INLINE_LINE_BREAK_BEFORE();
|
|
break;
|
|
}
|
|
// if we are on top of the page place with dataloss
|
|
if (kidReflowState.mFlags.mIsTopOfPage) {
|
|
if (childX+1 < rowGroups.Length()) {
|
|
nsIFrame* nextRowGroupFrame = rowGroups[childX + 1];
|
|
if (nextRowGroupFrame) {
|
|
PlaceChild(aReflowState, kidFrame,
|
|
kidPosition.GetPhysicalPoint(wm,
|
|
containerSize - desiredSize.PhysicalSize()),
|
|
desiredSize, oldKidRect, oldKidVisualOverflow);
|
|
if (allowRepeatedFooter) {
|
|
PlaceRepeatedFooter(aReflowState, tfoot, footerHeight);
|
|
}
|
|
else if (tfoot && tfoot->IsRepeatable()) {
|
|
tfoot->SetRepeatable(false);
|
|
}
|
|
aStatus = NS_FRAME_NOT_COMPLETE;
|
|
PushChildren(rowGroups, childX + 1);
|
|
aLastChildReflowed = kidFrame;
|
|
break;
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
else { // we are not on top, push this rowgroup onto the next page
|
|
if (prevKidFrame) { // we had a rowgroup before so push this
|
|
if (allowRepeatedFooter) {
|
|
PlaceRepeatedFooter(aReflowState, tfoot, footerHeight);
|
|
}
|
|
else if (tfoot && tfoot->IsRepeatable()) {
|
|
tfoot->SetRepeatable(false);
|
|
}
|
|
aStatus = NS_FRAME_NOT_COMPLETE;
|
|
PushChildren(rowGroups, childX);
|
|
aLastChildReflowed = prevKidFrame;
|
|
break;
|
|
}
|
|
else { // we can't push so lets make clear how much space we need
|
|
PlaceChild(aReflowState, kidFrame,
|
|
kidPosition.GetPhysicalPoint(wm,
|
|
containerSize - desiredSize.PhysicalSize()),
|
|
desiredSize, oldKidRect, oldKidVisualOverflow);
|
|
aLastChildReflowed = kidFrame;
|
|
if (allowRepeatedFooter) {
|
|
PlaceRepeatedFooter(aReflowState, tfoot, footerHeight);
|
|
aLastChildReflowed = tfoot;
|
|
}
|
|
break;
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
aLastChildReflowed = kidFrame;
|
|
|
|
pageBreak = false;
|
|
// see if there is a page break after this row group or before the next one
|
|
if (NS_FRAME_IS_COMPLETE(aStatus) && isPaginated &&
|
|
(NS_UNCONSTRAINEDSIZE != kidReflowState.AvailableHeight())) {
|
|
nsIFrame* nextKid =
|
|
(childX + 1 < rowGroups.Length()) ? rowGroups[childX + 1] : nullptr;
|
|
pageBreak = PageBreakAfter(kidFrame, nextKid);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
// Place the child
|
|
PlaceChild(aReflowState, kidFrame,
|
|
kidPosition.GetPhysicalPoint(wm, containerSize -
|
|
desiredSize.PhysicalSize()),
|
|
desiredSize, oldKidRect, oldKidVisualOverflow);
|
|
|
|
// Remember where we just were in case we end up pushing children
|
|
prevKidFrame = kidFrame;
|
|
|
|
// Special handling for incomplete children
|
|
if (NS_FRAME_IS_NOT_COMPLETE(aStatus)) {
|
|
nsIFrame* kidNextInFlow = kidFrame->GetNextInFlow();
|
|
if (!kidNextInFlow) {
|
|
// The child doesn't have a next-in-flow so create a continuing
|
|
// frame. This hooks the child into the flow
|
|
kidNextInFlow = presContext->PresShell()->FrameConstructor()->
|
|
CreateContinuingFrame(presContext, kidFrame, this);
|
|
|
|
// Insert the kid's new next-in-flow into our sibling list...
|
|
mFrames.InsertFrame(nullptr, kidFrame, kidNextInFlow);
|
|
// and in rowGroups after childX so that it will get pushed below.
|
|
rowGroups.InsertElementAt(childX + 1,
|
|
static_cast<nsTableRowGroupFrame*>(kidNextInFlow));
|
|
} else if (kidNextInFlow == kidFrame->GetNextSibling()) {
|
|
// OrderRowGroups excludes NIFs in the child list from 'rowGroups'
|
|
// so we deal with that here to make sure they get pushed.
|
|
MOZ_ASSERT(!rowGroups.Contains(kidNextInFlow),
|
|
"OrderRowGroups must not put our NIF in 'rowGroups'");
|
|
rowGroups.InsertElementAt(childX + 1,
|
|
static_cast<nsTableRowGroupFrame*>(kidNextInFlow));
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
// We've used up all of our available space so push the remaining
|
|
// children.
|
|
if (allowRepeatedFooter) {
|
|
PlaceRepeatedFooter(aReflowState, tfoot, footerHeight);
|
|
}
|
|
else if (tfoot && tfoot->IsRepeatable()) {
|
|
tfoot->SetRepeatable(false);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
nsIFrame* nextSibling = kidFrame->GetNextSibling();
|
|
if (nextSibling) {
|
|
PushChildren(rowGroups, childX + 1);
|
|
}
|
|
break;
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
else { // it isn't being reflowed
|
|
aReflowState.bCoord += cellSpacingB;
|
|
LogicalRect kidRect(wm, kidFrame->GetNormalRect(), containerSize);
|
|
if (kidRect.BStart(wm) != aReflowState.bCoord) {
|
|
// invalidate the old position
|
|
kidFrame->InvalidateFrameSubtree();
|
|
// move to the new position
|
|
kidFrame->MovePositionBy(wm, LogicalPoint(wm, 0, aReflowState.bCoord -
|
|
kidRect.BStart(wm)));
|
|
RePositionViews(kidFrame);
|
|
// invalidate the new position
|
|
kidFrame->InvalidateFrameSubtree();
|
|
}
|
|
aReflowState.bCoord += kidRect.BSize(wm);
|
|
|
|
// If our bsize is constrained then update the available bsize.
|
|
if (NS_UNCONSTRAINEDSIZE != aReflowState.availSize.BSize(wm)) {
|
|
aReflowState.availSize.BSize(wm) -= cellSpacingB + kidRect.BSize(wm);
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
// We've now propagated the column resizes and geometry changes to all
|
|
// the children.
|
|
mBits.mResizedColumns = false;
|
|
ClearGeometryDirty();
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
void
|
|
nsTableFrame::ReflowColGroups(nsRenderingContext *aRenderingContext)
|
|
{
|
|
if (!GetPrevInFlow() && !HaveReflowedColGroups()) {
|
|
nsHTMLReflowMetrics kidMet(GetWritingMode());
|
|
nsPresContext *presContext = PresContext();
|
|
for (nsIFrame* kidFrame : mColGroups) {
|
|
if (NS_SUBTREE_DIRTY(kidFrame)) {
|
|
// The column groups don't care about dimensions or reflow states.
|
|
nsHTMLReflowState
|
|
kidReflowState(presContext, kidFrame, aRenderingContext,
|
|
LogicalSize(kidFrame->GetWritingMode()));
|
|
nsReflowStatus cgStatus;
|
|
ReflowChild(kidFrame, presContext, kidMet, kidReflowState, 0, 0, 0,
|
|
cgStatus);
|
|
FinishReflowChild(kidFrame, presContext, kidMet, nullptr, 0, 0, 0);
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
SetHaveReflowedColGroups(true);
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
void
|
|
nsTableFrame::CalcDesiredBSize(const nsHTMLReflowState& aReflowState,
|
|
nsHTMLReflowMetrics& aDesiredSize)
|
|
{
|
|
WritingMode wm = aReflowState.GetWritingMode();
|
|
nsTableCellMap* cellMap = GetCellMap();
|
|
if (!cellMap) {
|
|
NS_ERROR("never ever call me until the cell map is built!");
|
|
aDesiredSize.BSize(wm) = 0;
|
|
return;
|
|
}
|
|
LogicalMargin borderPadding = GetChildAreaOffset(wm, &aReflowState);
|
|
|
|
// get the natural bsize based on the last child's (row group) rect
|
|
RowGroupArray rowGroups;
|
|
OrderRowGroups(rowGroups);
|
|
if (rowGroups.IsEmpty()) {
|
|
// tables can be used as rectangular items without content
|
|
nscoord tableSpecifiedBSize = CalcBorderBoxBSize(aReflowState);
|
|
if ((NS_UNCONSTRAINEDSIZE != tableSpecifiedBSize) &&
|
|
(tableSpecifiedBSize > 0) &&
|
|
eCompatibility_NavQuirks != PresContext()->CompatibilityMode()) {
|
|
// empty tables should not have a size in quirks mode
|
|
aDesiredSize.BSize(wm) = tableSpecifiedBSize;
|
|
} else {
|
|
aDesiredSize.BSize(wm) = 0;
|
|
}
|
|
return;
|
|
}
|
|
int32_t rowCount = cellMap->GetRowCount();
|
|
int32_t colCount = cellMap->GetColCount();
|
|
nscoord desiredBSize = borderPadding.BStartEnd(wm);
|
|
if (rowCount > 0 && colCount > 0) {
|
|
desiredBSize += GetRowSpacing(-1);
|
|
for (uint32_t rgIdx = 0; rgIdx < rowGroups.Length(); rgIdx++) {
|
|
desiredBSize += rowGroups[rgIdx]->BSize(wm) +
|
|
GetRowSpacing(rowGroups[rgIdx]->GetRowCount() +
|
|
rowGroups[rgIdx]->GetStartRowIndex());
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
// see if a specified table bsize requires dividing additional space to rows
|
|
if (!GetPrevInFlow()) {
|
|
nscoord tableSpecifiedBSize = CalcBorderBoxBSize(aReflowState);
|
|
if ((tableSpecifiedBSize > 0) &&
|
|
(tableSpecifiedBSize != NS_UNCONSTRAINEDSIZE) &&
|
|
(tableSpecifiedBSize > desiredBSize)) {
|
|
// proportionately distribute the excess bsize to unconstrained rows in each
|
|
// unconstrained row group.
|
|
DistributeBSizeToRows(aReflowState, tableSpecifiedBSize - desiredBSize);
|
|
// this might have changed the overflow area incorporate the childframe overflow area.
|
|
for (nsIFrame* kidFrame : mFrames) {
|
|
ConsiderChildOverflow(aDesiredSize.mOverflowAreas, kidFrame);
|
|
}
|
|
desiredBSize = tableSpecifiedBSize;
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
aDesiredSize.BSize(wm) = desiredBSize;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
static
|
|
void ResizeCells(nsTableFrame& aTableFrame)
|
|
{
|
|
nsTableFrame::RowGroupArray rowGroups;
|
|
aTableFrame.OrderRowGroups(rowGroups);
|
|
WritingMode wm = aTableFrame.GetWritingMode();
|
|
nsHTMLReflowMetrics tableDesiredSize(wm);
|
|
tableDesiredSize.SetSize(wm, aTableFrame.GetLogicalSize(wm));
|
|
tableDesiredSize.SetOverflowAreasToDesiredBounds();
|
|
|
|
for (uint32_t rgIdx = 0; rgIdx < rowGroups.Length(); rgIdx++) {
|
|
nsTableRowGroupFrame* rgFrame = rowGroups[rgIdx];
|
|
|
|
nsHTMLReflowMetrics groupDesiredSize(wm);
|
|
groupDesiredSize.SetSize(wm, rgFrame->GetLogicalSize(wm));
|
|
groupDesiredSize.SetOverflowAreasToDesiredBounds();
|
|
|
|
nsTableRowFrame* rowFrame = rgFrame->GetFirstRow();
|
|
while (rowFrame) {
|
|
rowFrame->DidResize();
|
|
rgFrame->ConsiderChildOverflow(groupDesiredSize.mOverflowAreas, rowFrame);
|
|
rowFrame = rowFrame->GetNextRow();
|
|
}
|
|
rgFrame->FinishAndStoreOverflow(&groupDesiredSize);
|
|
tableDesiredSize.mOverflowAreas.UnionWith(groupDesiredSize.mOverflowAreas +
|
|
rgFrame->GetPosition());
|
|
}
|
|
aTableFrame.FinishAndStoreOverflow(&tableDesiredSize);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
void
|
|
nsTableFrame::DistributeBSizeToRows(const nsHTMLReflowState& aReflowState,
|
|
nscoord aAmount)
|
|
{
|
|
WritingMode wm = aReflowState.GetWritingMode();
|
|
LogicalMargin borderPadding = GetChildAreaOffset(wm, &aReflowState);
|
|
|
|
nsSize containerSize =
|
|
aReflowState.ComputedSizeAsContainerIfConstrained();
|
|
|
|
RowGroupArray rowGroups;
|
|
OrderRowGroups(rowGroups);
|
|
|
|
nscoord amountUsed = 0;
|
|
// distribute space to each pct bsize row whose row group doesn't have a computed
|
|
// bsize, and base the pct on the table bsize. If the row group had a computed
|
|
// bsize, then this was already done in nsTableRowGroupFrame::CalculateRowBSizes
|
|
nscoord pctBasis = aReflowState.ComputedBSize() - GetRowSpacing(-1, GetRowCount());
|
|
nscoord bOriginRG = borderPadding.BStart(wm) + GetRowSpacing(0);
|
|
nscoord bEndRG = bOriginRG;
|
|
uint32_t rgIdx;
|
|
for (rgIdx = 0; rgIdx < rowGroups.Length(); rgIdx++) {
|
|
nsTableRowGroupFrame* rgFrame = rowGroups[rgIdx];
|
|
nscoord amountUsedByRG = 0;
|
|
nscoord bOriginRow = 0;
|
|
LogicalRect rgNormalRect(wm, rgFrame->GetNormalRect(), containerSize);
|
|
if (!rgFrame->HasStyleBSize()) {
|
|
nsTableRowFrame* rowFrame = rgFrame->GetFirstRow();
|
|
while (rowFrame) {
|
|
// We don't know the final width of the rowGroupFrame yet, so use 0,0
|
|
// as a dummy containerSize here; we'll adjust the row positions at
|
|
// the end, after the rowGroup size is finalized.
|
|
const nsSize dummyContainerSize;
|
|
LogicalRect rowNormalRect(wm, rowFrame->GetNormalRect(),
|
|
dummyContainerSize);
|
|
nscoord cellSpacingB = GetRowSpacing(rowFrame->GetRowIndex());
|
|
if ((amountUsed < aAmount) && rowFrame->HasPctBSize()) {
|
|
nscoord pctBSize = rowFrame->GetInitialBSize(pctBasis);
|
|
nscoord amountForRow = std::min(aAmount - amountUsed,
|
|
pctBSize - rowNormalRect.BSize(wm));
|
|
if (amountForRow > 0) {
|
|
// XXXbz we don't need to move the row's b-position to bOriginRow?
|
|
nsRect origRowRect = rowFrame->GetRect();
|
|
nscoord newRowBSize = rowNormalRect.BSize(wm) + amountForRow;
|
|
rowFrame->SetSize(wm, LogicalSize(wm, rowNormalRect.ISize(wm),
|
|
newRowBSize));
|
|
bOriginRow += newRowBSize + cellSpacingB;
|
|
bEndRG += newRowBSize + cellSpacingB;
|
|
amountUsed += amountForRow;
|
|
amountUsedByRG += amountForRow;
|
|
//rowFrame->DidResize();
|
|
nsTableFrame::RePositionViews(rowFrame);
|
|
|
|
rgFrame->InvalidateFrameWithRect(origRowRect);
|
|
rgFrame->InvalidateFrame();
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
else {
|
|
if (amountUsed > 0 && bOriginRow != rowNormalRect.BStart(wm) &&
|
|
!HasAnyStateBits(NS_FRAME_FIRST_REFLOW)) {
|
|
rowFrame->InvalidateFrameSubtree();
|
|
rowFrame->MovePositionBy(wm, LogicalPoint(wm, 0, bOriginRow -
|
|
rowNormalRect.BStart(wm)));
|
|
nsTableFrame::RePositionViews(rowFrame);
|
|
rowFrame->InvalidateFrameSubtree();
|
|
}
|
|
bOriginRow += rowNormalRect.BSize(wm) + cellSpacingB;
|
|
bEndRG += rowNormalRect.BSize(wm) + cellSpacingB;
|
|
}
|
|
rowFrame = rowFrame->GetNextRow();
|
|
}
|
|
if (amountUsed > 0) {
|
|
if (rgNormalRect.BStart(wm) != bOriginRG) {
|
|
rgFrame->InvalidateFrameSubtree();
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
nsRect origRgNormalRect = rgFrame->GetRect();
|
|
nsRect origRgVisualOverflow = rgFrame->GetVisualOverflowRect();
|
|
|
|
rgFrame->MovePositionBy(wm, LogicalPoint(wm, 0, bOriginRG -
|
|
rgNormalRect.BStart(wm)));
|
|
rgFrame->SetSize(wm, LogicalSize(wm, rgNormalRect.ISize(wm),
|
|
rgNormalRect.BSize(wm) + amountUsedByRG));
|
|
|
|
nsTableFrame::InvalidateTableFrame(rgFrame, origRgNormalRect,
|
|
origRgVisualOverflow, false);
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
else if (amountUsed > 0 && bOriginRG != rgNormalRect.BStart(wm)) {
|
|
rgFrame->InvalidateFrameSubtree();
|
|
rgFrame->MovePositionBy(wm, LogicalPoint(wm, 0, bOriginRG -
|
|
rgNormalRect.BStart(wm)));
|
|
// Make sure child views are properly positioned
|
|
nsTableFrame::RePositionViews(rgFrame);
|
|
rgFrame->InvalidateFrameSubtree();
|
|
}
|
|
bOriginRG = bEndRG;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
if (amountUsed >= aAmount) {
|
|
ResizeCells(*this);
|
|
return;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
// get the first row without a style bsize where its row group has an
|
|
// unconstrained bsize
|
|
nsTableRowGroupFrame* firstUnStyledRG = nullptr;
|
|
nsTableRowFrame* firstUnStyledRow = nullptr;
|
|
for (rgIdx = 0; rgIdx < rowGroups.Length() && !firstUnStyledRG; rgIdx++) {
|
|
nsTableRowGroupFrame* rgFrame = rowGroups[rgIdx];
|
|
if (!rgFrame->HasStyleBSize()) {
|
|
nsTableRowFrame* rowFrame = rgFrame->GetFirstRow();
|
|
while (rowFrame) {
|
|
if (!rowFrame->HasStyleBSize()) {
|
|
firstUnStyledRG = rgFrame;
|
|
firstUnStyledRow = rowFrame;
|
|
break;
|
|
}
|
|
rowFrame = rowFrame->GetNextRow();
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
nsTableRowFrame* lastEligibleRow = nullptr;
|
|
// Accumulate the correct divisor. This will be the total bsize of all
|
|
// unstyled rows inside unstyled row groups, unless there are none, in which
|
|
// case, it will be number of all rows. If the unstyled rows don't have a
|
|
// bsize, divide the space equally among them.
|
|
nscoord divisor = 0;
|
|
int32_t eligibleRows = 0;
|
|
bool expandEmptyRows = false;
|
|
|
|
if (!firstUnStyledRow) {
|
|
// there is no unstyled row
|
|
divisor = GetRowCount();
|
|
}
|
|
else {
|
|
for (rgIdx = 0; rgIdx < rowGroups.Length(); rgIdx++) {
|
|
nsTableRowGroupFrame* rgFrame = rowGroups[rgIdx];
|
|
if (!firstUnStyledRG || !rgFrame->HasStyleBSize()) {
|
|
nsTableRowFrame* rowFrame = rgFrame->GetFirstRow();
|
|
while (rowFrame) {
|
|
if (!firstUnStyledRG || !rowFrame->HasStyleBSize()) {
|
|
NS_ASSERTION(rowFrame->BSize(wm) >= 0,
|
|
"negative row frame block-size");
|
|
divisor += rowFrame->BSize(wm);
|
|
eligibleRows++;
|
|
lastEligibleRow = rowFrame;
|
|
}
|
|
rowFrame = rowFrame->GetNextRow();
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
if (divisor <= 0) {
|
|
if (eligibleRows > 0) {
|
|
expandEmptyRows = true;
|
|
}
|
|
else {
|
|
NS_ERROR("invalid divisor");
|
|
return;
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
// allocate the extra bsize to the unstyled row groups and rows
|
|
nscoord bSizeToDistribute = aAmount - amountUsed;
|
|
bOriginRG = borderPadding.BStart(wm) + GetRowSpacing(-1);
|
|
bEndRG = bOriginRG;
|
|
for (rgIdx = 0; rgIdx < rowGroups.Length(); rgIdx++) {
|
|
nsTableRowGroupFrame* rgFrame = rowGroups[rgIdx];
|
|
nscoord amountUsedByRG = 0;
|
|
nscoord bOriginRow = 0;
|
|
LogicalRect rgNormalRect(wm, rgFrame->GetNormalRect(), containerSize);
|
|
nsRect rgVisualOverflow = rgFrame->GetVisualOverflowRect();
|
|
// see if there is an eligible row group or we distribute to all rows
|
|
if (!firstUnStyledRG || !rgFrame->HasStyleBSize() || !eligibleRows) {
|
|
for (nsTableRowFrame* rowFrame = rgFrame->GetFirstRow();
|
|
rowFrame; rowFrame = rowFrame->GetNextRow()) {
|
|
nscoord cellSpacingB = GetRowSpacing(rowFrame->GetRowIndex());
|
|
// We don't know the final width of the rowGroupFrame yet, so use 0,0
|
|
// as a dummy containerSize here; we'll adjust the row positions at
|
|
// the end, after the rowGroup size is finalized.
|
|
const nsSize dummyContainerSize;
|
|
LogicalRect rowNormalRect(wm, rowFrame->GetNormalRect(),
|
|
dummyContainerSize);
|
|
nsRect rowVisualOverflow = rowFrame->GetVisualOverflowRect();
|
|
// see if there is an eligible row or we distribute to all rows
|
|
if (!firstUnStyledRow || !rowFrame->HasStyleBSize() || !eligibleRows) {
|
|
float ratio;
|
|
if (eligibleRows) {
|
|
if (!expandEmptyRows) {
|
|
// The amount of additional space each row gets is proportional
|
|
// to its bsize
|
|
ratio = float(rowNormalRect.BSize(wm)) / float(divisor);
|
|
} else {
|
|
// empty rows get all the same additional space
|
|
ratio = 1.0f / float(eligibleRows);
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
else {
|
|
// all rows get the same additional space
|
|
ratio = 1.0f / float(divisor);
|
|
}
|
|
// give rows their additional space, except for the last row which
|
|
// gets the remainder
|
|
nscoord amountForRow =
|
|
(rowFrame == lastEligibleRow)
|
|
? aAmount - amountUsed
|
|
: NSToCoordRound(((float)(bSizeToDistribute)) * ratio);
|
|
amountForRow = std::min(amountForRow, aAmount - amountUsed);
|
|
|
|
if (bOriginRow != rowNormalRect.BStart(wm)) {
|
|
rowFrame->InvalidateFrameSubtree();
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
// update the row bsize
|
|
nsRect origRowRect = rowFrame->GetRect();
|
|
nscoord newRowBSize = rowNormalRect.BSize(wm) + amountForRow;
|
|
rowFrame->MovePositionBy(wm, LogicalPoint(wm, 0, bOriginRow -
|
|
rowNormalRect.BStart(wm)));
|
|
rowFrame->SetSize(wm, LogicalSize(wm, rowNormalRect.ISize(wm),
|
|
newRowBSize));
|
|
|
|
bOriginRow += newRowBSize + cellSpacingB;
|
|
bEndRG += newRowBSize + cellSpacingB;
|
|
|
|
amountUsed += amountForRow;
|
|
amountUsedByRG += amountForRow;
|
|
NS_ASSERTION((amountUsed <= aAmount), "invalid row allocation");
|
|
//rowFrame->DidResize();
|
|
nsTableFrame::RePositionViews(rowFrame);
|
|
|
|
nsTableFrame::InvalidateTableFrame(rowFrame, origRowRect,
|
|
rowVisualOverflow, false);
|
|
}
|
|
else {
|
|
if (amountUsed > 0 && bOriginRow != rowNormalRect.BStart(wm)) {
|
|
rowFrame->InvalidateFrameSubtree();
|
|
rowFrame->MovePositionBy(wm, LogicalPoint(wm, 0, bOriginRow -
|
|
rowNormalRect.BStart(wm)));
|
|
nsTableFrame::RePositionViews(rowFrame);
|
|
rowFrame->InvalidateFrameSubtree();
|
|
}
|
|
bOriginRow += rowNormalRect.BSize(wm) + cellSpacingB;
|
|
bEndRG += rowNormalRect.BSize(wm) + cellSpacingB;
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
if (amountUsed > 0) {
|
|
if (rgNormalRect.BStart(wm) != bOriginRG) {
|
|
rgFrame->InvalidateFrameSubtree();
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
nsRect origRgNormalRect = rgFrame->GetRect();
|
|
rgFrame->MovePositionBy(wm, LogicalPoint(wm, 0, bOriginRG -
|
|
rgNormalRect.BStart(wm)));
|
|
rgFrame->SetSize(wm, LogicalSize(wm, rgNormalRect.ISize(wm),
|
|
rgNormalRect.BSize(wm) + amountUsedByRG));
|
|
|
|
nsTableFrame::InvalidateTableFrame(rgFrame, origRgNormalRect,
|
|
rgVisualOverflow, false);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
// For vertical-rl mode, we needed to position the rows relative to the
|
|
// right-hand (block-start) side of the group; but we couldn't do that
|
|
// above, as we didn't know the rowGroupFrame's final block size yet.
|
|
// So we used a dummyContainerSize of 0,0 earlier, placing the rows to
|
|
// the left of the rowGroupFrame's (physical) origin. Now we move them
|
|
// all rightwards by its final width.
|
|
if (wm.IsVerticalRL()) {
|
|
nscoord rgWidth = rgFrame->GetSize().width;
|
|
for (nsTableRowFrame* rowFrame = rgFrame->GetFirstRow();
|
|
rowFrame; rowFrame = rowFrame->GetNextRow()) {
|
|
rowFrame->InvalidateFrameSubtree();
|
|
rowFrame->MovePositionBy(nsPoint(rgWidth, 0));
|
|
nsTableFrame::RePositionViews(rowFrame);
|
|
rowFrame->InvalidateFrameSubtree();
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
else if (amountUsed > 0 && bOriginRG != rgNormalRect.BStart(wm)) {
|
|
rgFrame->InvalidateFrameSubtree();
|
|
rgFrame->MovePositionBy(wm, LogicalPoint(wm, 0, bOriginRG -
|
|
rgNormalRect.BStart(wm)));
|
|
// Make sure child views are properly positioned
|
|
nsTableFrame::RePositionViews(rgFrame);
|
|
rgFrame->InvalidateFrameSubtree();
|
|
}
|
|
bOriginRG = bEndRG;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
ResizeCells(*this);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
nscoord
|
|
nsTableFrame::GetColumnISizeFromFirstInFlow(int32_t aColIndex)
|
|
{
|
|
MOZ_ASSERT(this == FirstInFlow());
|
|
nsTableColFrame* colFrame = GetColFrame(aColIndex);
|
|
return colFrame ? colFrame->GetFinalISize() : 0;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
nscoord
|
|
nsTableFrame::GetColSpacing()
|
|
{
|
|
if (IsBorderCollapse())
|
|
return 0;
|
|
|
|
return StyleTableBorder()->mBorderSpacingCol;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
// XXX: could cache this. But be sure to check style changes if you do!
|
|
nscoord
|
|
nsTableFrame::GetColSpacing(int32_t aColIndex)
|
|
{
|
|
NS_ASSERTION(aColIndex >= -1 && aColIndex <= GetColCount(),
|
|
"Column index exceeds the bounds of the table");
|
|
// Index is irrelevant for ordinary tables. We check that it falls within
|
|
// appropriate bounds to increase confidence of correctness in situations
|
|
// where it does matter.
|
|
return GetColSpacing();
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
nscoord
|
|
nsTableFrame::GetColSpacing(int32_t aStartColIndex,
|
|
int32_t aEndColIndex)
|
|
{
|
|
NS_ASSERTION(aStartColIndex >= -1 && aStartColIndex <= GetColCount(),
|
|
"Start column index exceeds the bounds of the table");
|
|
NS_ASSERTION(aEndColIndex >= -1 && aEndColIndex <= GetColCount(),
|
|
"End column index exceeds the bounds of the table");
|
|
NS_ASSERTION(aStartColIndex <= aEndColIndex,
|
|
"End index must not be less than start index");
|
|
// Only one possible value so just multiply it out. Tables where index
|
|
// matters will override this function
|
|
return GetColSpacing() * (aEndColIndex - aStartColIndex);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
nscoord
|
|
nsTableFrame::GetRowSpacing()
|
|
{
|
|
if (IsBorderCollapse())
|
|
return 0;
|
|
|
|
return StyleTableBorder()->mBorderSpacingRow;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
// XXX: could cache this. But be sure to check style changes if you do!
|
|
nscoord
|
|
nsTableFrame::GetRowSpacing(int32_t aRowIndex)
|
|
{
|
|
NS_ASSERTION(aRowIndex >= -1 && aRowIndex <= GetRowCount(),
|
|
"Row index exceeds the bounds of the table");
|
|
// Index is irrelevant for ordinary tables. We check that it falls within
|
|
// appropriate bounds to increase confidence of correctness in situations
|
|
// where it does matter.
|
|
return GetRowSpacing();
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
nscoord
|
|
nsTableFrame::GetRowSpacing(int32_t aStartRowIndex,
|
|
int32_t aEndRowIndex)
|
|
{
|
|
NS_ASSERTION(aStartRowIndex >= -1 && aStartRowIndex <= GetRowCount(),
|
|
"Start row index exceeds the bounds of the table");
|
|
NS_ASSERTION(aEndRowIndex >= -1 && aEndRowIndex <= GetRowCount(),
|
|
"End row index exceeds the bounds of the table");
|
|
NS_ASSERTION(aStartRowIndex <= aEndRowIndex,
|
|
"End index must not be less than start index");
|
|
// Only one possible value so just multiply it out. Tables where index
|
|
// matters will override this function
|
|
return GetRowSpacing() * (aEndRowIndex - aStartRowIndex);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/* virtual */ nscoord
|
|
nsTableFrame::GetLogicalBaseline(WritingMode aWritingMode) const
|
|
{
|
|
nscoord ascent = 0;
|
|
RowGroupArray orderedRowGroups;
|
|
OrderRowGroups(orderedRowGroups);
|
|
nsTableRowFrame* firstRow = nullptr;
|
|
// XXX not sure if this should be the size of the containing block instead.
|
|
nsSize containerSize = mRect.Size();
|
|
for (uint32_t rgIndex = 0; rgIndex < orderedRowGroups.Length(); rgIndex++) {
|
|
nsTableRowGroupFrame* rgFrame = orderedRowGroups[rgIndex];
|
|
if (rgFrame->GetRowCount()) {
|
|
firstRow = rgFrame->GetFirstRow();
|
|
|
|
nscoord rgNormalBStart =
|
|
LogicalRect(aWritingMode, rgFrame->GetNormalRect(), containerSize)
|
|
.Origin(aWritingMode).B(aWritingMode);
|
|
nscoord firstRowNormalBStart =
|
|
LogicalRect(aWritingMode, firstRow->GetNormalRect(), containerSize)
|
|
.Origin(aWritingMode).B(aWritingMode);
|
|
|
|
ascent = rgNormalBStart + firstRowNormalBStart +
|
|
firstRow->GetRowBaseline(aWritingMode);
|
|
break;
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
if (!firstRow)
|
|
ascent = BSize(aWritingMode);
|
|
return ascent;
|
|
}
|
|
/* ----- global methods ----- */
|
|
|
|
nsTableFrame*
|
|
NS_NewTableFrame(nsIPresShell* aPresShell, nsStyleContext* aContext)
|
|
{
|
|
return new (aPresShell) nsTableFrame(aContext);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
NS_IMPL_FRAMEARENA_HELPERS(nsTableFrame)
|
|
|
|
nsTableFrame*
|
|
nsTableFrame::GetTableFrame(nsIFrame* aFrame)
|
|
{
|
|
for (nsIFrame* ancestor = aFrame->GetParent(); ancestor;
|
|
ancestor = ancestor->GetParent()) {
|
|
if (nsGkAtoms::tableFrame == ancestor->GetType()) {
|
|
return static_cast<nsTableFrame*>(ancestor);
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
NS_RUNTIMEABORT("unable to find table parent");
|
|
return nullptr;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
nsTableFrame*
|
|
nsTableFrame::GetTableFramePassingThrough(nsIFrame* aMustPassThrough,
|
|
nsIFrame* aFrame)
|
|
{
|
|
MOZ_ASSERT(aMustPassThrough == aFrame ||
|
|
nsLayoutUtils::IsProperAncestorFrame(aMustPassThrough, aFrame),
|
|
"aMustPassThrough should be an ancestor");
|
|
|
|
// Retrieve the table frame, and ensure that we hit aMustPassThrough on the
|
|
// way. If we don't, just return null.
|
|
bool hitPassThroughFrame = false;
|
|
nsTableFrame* tableFrame = nullptr;
|
|
for (nsIFrame* ancestor = aFrame; ancestor; ancestor = ancestor->GetParent()) {
|
|
if (ancestor == aMustPassThrough) {
|
|
hitPassThroughFrame = true;
|
|
}
|
|
if (nsGkAtoms::tableFrame == ancestor->GetType()) {
|
|
tableFrame = static_cast<nsTableFrame*>(ancestor);
|
|
break;
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
MOZ_ASSERT(tableFrame, "Should have a table frame here");
|
|
return hitPassThroughFrame ? tableFrame : nullptr;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
bool
|
|
nsTableFrame::IsAutoBSize(WritingMode aWM)
|
|
{
|
|
const nsStyleCoord &bsize = StylePosition()->BSize(aWM);
|
|
// Don't consider calc() here like this quirk for percent.
|
|
return bsize.GetUnit() == eStyleUnit_Auto ||
|
|
(bsize.GetUnit() == eStyleUnit_Percent &&
|
|
bsize.GetPercentValue() <= 0.0f);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
nscoord
|
|
nsTableFrame::CalcBorderBoxBSize(const nsHTMLReflowState& aState)
|
|
{
|
|
nscoord bSize = aState.ComputedBSize();
|
|
if (NS_AUTOHEIGHT != bSize) {
|
|
WritingMode wm = aState.GetWritingMode();
|
|
LogicalMargin borderPadding = GetChildAreaOffset(wm, &aState);
|
|
bSize += borderPadding.BStartEnd(wm);
|
|
}
|
|
bSize = std::max(0, bSize);
|
|
|
|
return bSize;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
bool
|
|
nsTableFrame::IsAutoLayout()
|
|
{
|
|
if (StyleTable()->mLayoutStrategy == NS_STYLE_TABLE_LAYOUT_AUTO)
|
|
return true;
|
|
// a fixed-layout inline-table must have a inline size
|
|
// and tables with inline size set to '-moz-max-content' must be
|
|
// auto-layout (at least as long as
|
|
// FixedTableLayoutStrategy::GetPrefISize returns nscoord_MAX)
|
|
const nsStyleCoord &iSize = StylePosition()->ISize(GetWritingMode());
|
|
return (iSize.GetUnit() == eStyleUnit_Auto) ||
|
|
(iSize.GetUnit() == eStyleUnit_Enumerated &&
|
|
iSize.GetIntValue() == NS_STYLE_WIDTH_MAX_CONTENT);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
#ifdef DEBUG_FRAME_DUMP
|
|
nsresult
|
|
nsTableFrame::GetFrameName(nsAString& aResult) const
|
|
{
|
|
return MakeFrameName(NS_LITERAL_STRING("Table"), aResult);
|
|
}
|
|
#endif
|
|
|
|
// Find the closet sibling before aPriorChildFrame (including aPriorChildFrame) that
|
|
// is of type aChildType
|
|
nsIFrame*
|
|
nsTableFrame::GetFrameAtOrBefore(nsIFrame* aParentFrame,
|
|
nsIFrame* aPriorChildFrame,
|
|
nsIAtom* aChildType)
|
|
{
|
|
nsIFrame* result = nullptr;
|
|
if (!aPriorChildFrame) {
|
|
return result;
|
|
}
|
|
if (aChildType == aPriorChildFrame->GetType()) {
|
|
return aPriorChildFrame;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
// aPriorChildFrame is not of type aChildType, so we need start from
|
|
// the beginnng and find the closest one
|
|
nsIFrame* lastMatchingFrame = nullptr;
|
|
nsIFrame* childFrame = aParentFrame->GetFirstPrincipalChild();
|
|
while (childFrame && (childFrame != aPriorChildFrame)) {
|
|
if (aChildType == childFrame->GetType()) {
|
|
lastMatchingFrame = childFrame;
|
|
}
|
|
childFrame = childFrame->GetNextSibling();
|
|
}
|
|
return lastMatchingFrame;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
#ifdef DEBUG
|
|
void
|
|
nsTableFrame::DumpRowGroup(nsIFrame* aKidFrame)
|
|
{
|
|
if (!aKidFrame)
|
|
return;
|
|
|
|
nsIFrame* cFrame = aKidFrame->GetFirstPrincipalChild();
|
|
while (cFrame) {
|
|
nsTableRowFrame *rowFrame = do_QueryFrame(cFrame);
|
|
if (rowFrame) {
|
|
printf("row(%d)=%p ", rowFrame->GetRowIndex(),
|
|
static_cast<void*>(rowFrame));
|
|
nsIFrame* childFrame = cFrame->GetFirstPrincipalChild();
|
|
while (childFrame) {
|
|
nsTableCellFrame *cellFrame = do_QueryFrame(childFrame);
|
|
if (cellFrame) {
|
|
int32_t colIndex;
|
|
cellFrame->GetColIndex(colIndex);
|
|
printf("cell(%d)=%p ", colIndex, static_cast<void*>(childFrame));
|
|
}
|
|
childFrame = childFrame->GetNextSibling();
|
|
}
|
|
printf("\n");
|
|
}
|
|
else {
|
|
DumpRowGroup(rowFrame);
|
|
}
|
|
cFrame = cFrame->GetNextSibling();
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
void
|
|
nsTableFrame::Dump(bool aDumpRows,
|
|
bool aDumpCols,
|
|
bool aDumpCellMap)
|
|
{
|
|
printf("***START TABLE DUMP*** \n");
|
|
// dump the columns widths array
|
|
printf("mColWidths=");
|
|
int32_t numCols = GetColCount();
|
|
int32_t colIdx;
|
|
nsTableFrame* fif = static_cast<nsTableFrame*>(FirstInFlow());
|
|
for (colIdx = 0; colIdx < numCols; colIdx++) {
|
|
printf("%d ", fif->GetColumnISizeFromFirstInFlow(colIdx));
|
|
}
|
|
printf("\n");
|
|
|
|
if (aDumpRows) {
|
|
nsIFrame* kidFrame = mFrames.FirstChild();
|
|
while (kidFrame) {
|
|
DumpRowGroup(kidFrame);
|
|
kidFrame = kidFrame->GetNextSibling();
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
if (aDumpCols) {
|
|
// output col frame cache
|
|
printf("\n col frame cache ->");
|
|
for (colIdx = 0; colIdx < numCols; colIdx++) {
|
|
nsTableColFrame* colFrame = mColFrames.ElementAt(colIdx);
|
|
if (0 == (colIdx % 8)) {
|
|
printf("\n");
|
|
}
|
|
printf ("%d=%p ", colIdx, static_cast<void*>(colFrame));
|
|
nsTableColType colType = colFrame->GetColType();
|
|
switch (colType) {
|
|
case eColContent:
|
|
printf(" content ");
|
|
break;
|
|
case eColAnonymousCol:
|
|
printf(" anonymous-column ");
|
|
break;
|
|
case eColAnonymousColGroup:
|
|
printf(" anonymous-colgroup ");
|
|
break;
|
|
case eColAnonymousCell:
|
|
printf(" anonymous-cell ");
|
|
break;
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
printf("\n colgroups->");
|
|
for (nsIFrame* childFrame : mColGroups) {
|
|
if (nsGkAtoms::tableColGroupFrame == childFrame->GetType()) {
|
|
nsTableColGroupFrame* colGroupFrame = (nsTableColGroupFrame *)childFrame;
|
|
colGroupFrame->Dump(1);
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
for (colIdx = 0; colIdx < numCols; colIdx++) {
|
|
printf("\n");
|
|
nsTableColFrame* colFrame = GetColFrame(colIdx);
|
|
colFrame->Dump(1);
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
if (aDumpCellMap) {
|
|
nsTableCellMap* cellMap = GetCellMap();
|
|
cellMap->Dump();
|
|
}
|
|
printf(" ***END TABLE DUMP*** \n");
|
|
}
|
|
#endif
|
|
|
|
bool
|
|
nsTableFrame::ColumnHasCellSpacingBefore(int32_t aColIndex) const
|
|
{
|
|
// Since fixed-layout tables should not have their column sizes change
|
|
// as they load, we assume that all columns are significant.
|
|
if (LayoutStrategy()->GetType() == nsITableLayoutStrategy::Fixed)
|
|
return true;
|
|
// the first column is always significant
|
|
if (aColIndex == 0)
|
|
return true;
|
|
nsTableCellMap* cellMap = GetCellMap();
|
|
if (!cellMap)
|
|
return false;
|
|
return cellMap->GetNumCellsOriginatingInCol(aColIndex) > 0;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/********************************************************************************
|
|
* Collapsing Borders
|
|
*
|
|
* The CSS spec says to resolve border conflicts in this order:
|
|
* 1) any border with the style HIDDEN wins
|
|
* 2) the widest border with a style that is not NONE wins
|
|
* 3) the border styles are ranked in this order, highest to lowest precedence:
|
|
* double, solid, dashed, dotted, ridge, outset, groove, inset
|
|
* 4) borders that are of equal width and style (differ only in color) have this precedence:
|
|
* cell, row, rowgroup, col, colgroup, table
|
|
* 5) if all border styles are NONE, then that's the computed border style.
|
|
*******************************************************************************/
|
|
|
|
#ifdef DEBUG
|
|
#define VerifyNonNegativeDamageRect(r) \
|
|
NS_ASSERTION((r).StartCol() >= 0, "negative col index"); \
|
|
NS_ASSERTION((r).StartRow() >= 0, "negative row index"); \
|
|
NS_ASSERTION((r).ColCount() >= 0, "negative cols damage"); \
|
|
NS_ASSERTION((r).RowCount() >= 0, "negative rows damage");
|
|
#define VerifyDamageRect(r) \
|
|
VerifyNonNegativeDamageRect(r); \
|
|
NS_ASSERTION((r).EndCol() <= GetColCount(), \
|
|
"cols damage extends outside table"); \
|
|
NS_ASSERTION((r).EndRow() <= GetRowCount(), \
|
|
"rows damage extends outside table");
|
|
#endif
|
|
|
|
void
|
|
nsTableFrame::AddBCDamageArea(const TableArea& aValue)
|
|
{
|
|
NS_ASSERTION(IsBorderCollapse(), "invalid AddBCDamageArea call");
|
|
#ifdef DEBUG
|
|
VerifyDamageRect(aValue);
|
|
#endif
|
|
|
|
SetNeedToCalcBCBorders(true);
|
|
// Get the property
|
|
BCPropertyData* value = GetBCProperty(true);
|
|
if (value) {
|
|
#ifdef DEBUG
|
|
VerifyNonNegativeDamageRect(value->mDamageArea);
|
|
#endif
|
|
// Clamp the old damage area to the current table area in case it shrunk.
|
|
int32_t cols = GetColCount();
|
|
if (value->mDamageArea.EndCol() > cols) {
|
|
if (value->mDamageArea.StartCol() > cols) {
|
|
value->mDamageArea.StartCol() = cols;
|
|
value->mDamageArea.ColCount() = 0;
|
|
}
|
|
else {
|
|
value->mDamageArea.ColCount() = cols - value->mDamageArea.StartCol();
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
int32_t rows = GetRowCount();
|
|
if (value->mDamageArea.EndRow() > rows) {
|
|
if (value->mDamageArea.StartRow() > rows) {
|
|
value->mDamageArea.StartRow() = rows;
|
|
value->mDamageArea.RowCount() = 0;
|
|
}
|
|
else {
|
|
value->mDamageArea.RowCount() = rows - value->mDamageArea.StartRow();
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
// Construct a union of the new and old damage areas.
|
|
value->mDamageArea.UnionArea(value->mDamageArea, aValue);
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
void
|
|
nsTableFrame::SetFullBCDamageArea()
|
|
{
|
|
NS_ASSERTION(IsBorderCollapse(), "invalid SetFullBCDamageArea call");
|
|
|
|
SetNeedToCalcBCBorders(true);
|
|
|
|
BCPropertyData* value = GetBCProperty(true);
|
|
if (value) {
|
|
value->mDamageArea = TableArea(0, 0, GetColCount(), GetRowCount());
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
/* BCCellBorder represents a border segment which can be either an inline-dir
|
|
* or a block-dir segment. For each segment we need to know the color, width,
|
|
* style, who owns it and how long it is in cellmap coordinates.
|
|
* Ownership of these segments is important to calculate which corners should
|
|
* be bevelled. This structure has dual use, its used first to compute the
|
|
* dominant border for inline-dir and block-dir segments and to store the
|
|
* preliminary computed border results in the BCCellBorders structure.
|
|
* This temporary storage is not symmetric with respect to inline-dir and
|
|
* block-dir border segments, its always column oriented. For each column in
|
|
* the cellmap there is a temporary stored block-dir and inline-dir segment.
|
|
* XXX_Bernd this asymmetry is the root of those rowspan bc border errors
|
|
*/
|
|
struct BCCellBorder
|
|
{
|
|
BCCellBorder() { Reset(0, 1); }
|
|
void Reset(uint32_t aRowIndex, uint32_t aRowSpan);
|
|
nscolor color; // border segment color
|
|
BCPixelSize width; // border segment width in pixel coordinates !!
|
|
uint8_t style; // border segment style, possible values are defined
|
|
// in nsStyleConsts.h as NS_STYLE_BORDER_STYLE_*
|
|
BCBorderOwner owner; // border segment owner, possible values are defined
|
|
// in celldata.h. In the cellmap for each border
|
|
// segment we store the owner and later when
|
|
// painting we know the owner and can retrieve the
|
|
// style info from the corresponding frame
|
|
int32_t rowIndex; // rowIndex of temporary stored inline-dir border
|
|
// segments relative to the table
|
|
int32_t rowSpan; // row span of temporary stored inline-dir border
|
|
// segments
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
void
|
|
BCCellBorder::Reset(uint32_t aRowIndex,
|
|
uint32_t aRowSpan)
|
|
{
|
|
style = NS_STYLE_BORDER_STYLE_NONE;
|
|
color = 0;
|
|
width = 0;
|
|
owner = eTableOwner;
|
|
rowIndex = aRowIndex;
|
|
rowSpan = aRowSpan;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
class BCMapCellIterator;
|
|
|
|
/*****************************************************************
|
|
* BCMapCellInfo
|
|
* This structure stores information about the cellmap and all involved
|
|
* table related frames that are used during the computation of winning borders
|
|
* in CalcBCBorders so that they do need to be looked up again and again when
|
|
* iterating over the cells.
|
|
****************************************************************/
|
|
struct BCMapCellInfo
|
|
{
|
|
explicit BCMapCellInfo(nsTableFrame* aTableFrame);
|
|
void ResetCellInfo();
|
|
void SetInfo(nsTableRowFrame* aNewRow,
|
|
int32_t aColIndex,
|
|
BCCellData* aCellData,
|
|
BCMapCellIterator* aIter,
|
|
nsCellMap* aCellMap = nullptr);
|
|
// The BCMapCellInfo has functions to set the continous
|
|
// border widths (see nsTablePainter.cpp for a description of the continous
|
|
// borders concept). The widths are computed inside these functions based on
|
|
// the current position inside the table and the cached frames that correspond
|
|
// to this position. The widths are stored in member variables of the internal
|
|
// table frames.
|
|
void SetTableBStartIStartContBCBorder();
|
|
void SetRowGroupIStartContBCBorder();
|
|
void SetRowGroupIEndContBCBorder();
|
|
void SetRowGroupBEndContBCBorder();
|
|
void SetRowIStartContBCBorder();
|
|
void SetRowIEndContBCBorder();
|
|
void SetColumnBStartIEndContBCBorder();
|
|
void SetColumnBEndContBCBorder();
|
|
void SetColGroupBEndContBCBorder();
|
|
void SetInnerRowGroupBEndContBCBorder(const nsIFrame* aNextRowGroup,
|
|
nsTableRowFrame* aNextRow);
|
|
|
|
// functions to set the border widths on the table related frames, where the
|
|
// knowledge about the current position in the table is used.
|
|
void SetTableBStartBorderWidth(BCPixelSize aWidth);
|
|
void SetTableIStartBorderWidth(int32_t aRowB, BCPixelSize aWidth);
|
|
void SetTableIEndBorderWidth(int32_t aRowB, BCPixelSize aWidth);
|
|
void SetTableBEndBorderWidth(BCPixelSize aWidth);
|
|
void SetIStartBorderWidths(BCPixelSize aWidth);
|
|
void SetIEndBorderWidths(BCPixelSize aWidth);
|
|
void SetBStartBorderWidths(BCPixelSize aWidth);
|
|
void SetBEndBorderWidths(BCPixelSize aWidth);
|
|
|
|
// functions to compute the borders; they depend on the
|
|
// knowledge about the current position in the table. The edge functions
|
|
// should be called if a table edge is involved, otherwise the internal
|
|
// functions should be called.
|
|
BCCellBorder GetBStartEdgeBorder();
|
|
BCCellBorder GetBEndEdgeBorder();
|
|
BCCellBorder GetIStartEdgeBorder();
|
|
BCCellBorder GetIEndEdgeBorder();
|
|
BCCellBorder GetIEndInternalBorder();
|
|
BCCellBorder GetIStartInternalBorder();
|
|
BCCellBorder GetBStartInternalBorder();
|
|
BCCellBorder GetBEndInternalBorder();
|
|
|
|
// functions to set the internal position information
|
|
void SetColumn(int32_t aColX);
|
|
// Increment the row as we loop over the rows of a rowspan
|
|
void IncrementRow(bool aResetToBStartRowOfCell = false);
|
|
|
|
// Helper functions to get extent of the cell
|
|
int32_t GetCellEndRowIndex() const;
|
|
int32_t GetCellEndColIndex() const;
|
|
|
|
// storage of table information
|
|
nsTableFrame* mTableFrame;
|
|
int32_t mNumTableRows;
|
|
int32_t mNumTableCols;
|
|
BCPropertyData* mTableBCData;
|
|
WritingMode mTableWM;
|
|
|
|
// a cell can only belong to one rowgroup
|
|
nsTableRowGroupFrame* mRowGroup;
|
|
|
|
// a cell with a rowspan has a bstart and a bend row, and rows in between
|
|
nsTableRowFrame* mStartRow;
|
|
nsTableRowFrame* mEndRow;
|
|
nsTableRowFrame* mCurrentRowFrame;
|
|
|
|
// a cell with a colspan has an istart and iend column and columns in between
|
|
// they can belong to different colgroups
|
|
nsTableColGroupFrame* mColGroup;
|
|
nsTableColGroupFrame* mCurrentColGroupFrame;
|
|
|
|
nsTableColFrame* mStartCol;
|
|
nsTableColFrame* mEndCol;
|
|
nsTableColFrame* mCurrentColFrame;
|
|
|
|
// cell information
|
|
BCCellData* mCellData;
|
|
nsBCTableCellFrame* mCell;
|
|
|
|
int32_t mRowIndex;
|
|
int32_t mRowSpan;
|
|
int32_t mColIndex;
|
|
int32_t mColSpan;
|
|
|
|
// flags to describe the position of the cell with respect to the row- and
|
|
// colgroups, for instance mRgAtStart documents that the bStart cell border hits
|
|
// a rowgroup border
|
|
bool mRgAtStart;
|
|
bool mRgAtEnd;
|
|
bool mCgAtStart;
|
|
bool mCgAtEnd;
|
|
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
|
|
BCMapCellInfo::BCMapCellInfo(nsTableFrame* aTableFrame)
|
|
: mTableFrame(aTableFrame)
|
|
, mNumTableRows(aTableFrame->GetRowCount())
|
|
, mNumTableCols(aTableFrame->GetColCount())
|
|
, mTableBCData(static_cast<BCPropertyData*>(
|
|
mTableFrame->Properties().Get(TableBCProperty())))
|
|
, mTableWM(aTableFrame->StyleContext())
|
|
{
|
|
ResetCellInfo();
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
void
|
|
BCMapCellInfo::ResetCellInfo()
|
|
{
|
|
mCellData = nullptr;
|
|
mRowGroup = nullptr;
|
|
mStartRow = nullptr;
|
|
mEndRow = nullptr;
|
|
mColGroup = nullptr;
|
|
mStartCol = nullptr;
|
|
mEndCol = nullptr;
|
|
mCell = nullptr;
|
|
mRowIndex = mRowSpan = mColIndex = mColSpan = 0;
|
|
mRgAtStart = mRgAtEnd = mCgAtStart = mCgAtEnd = false;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
inline int32_t
|
|
BCMapCellInfo::GetCellEndRowIndex() const
|
|
{
|
|
return mRowIndex + mRowSpan - 1;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
inline int32_t
|
|
BCMapCellInfo::GetCellEndColIndex() const
|
|
{
|
|
return mColIndex + mColSpan - 1;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
class BCMapCellIterator
|
|
{
|
|
public:
|
|
BCMapCellIterator(nsTableFrame* aTableFrame,
|
|
const TableArea& aDamageArea);
|
|
|
|
void First(BCMapCellInfo& aMapCellInfo);
|
|
|
|
void Next(BCMapCellInfo& aMapCellInfo);
|
|
|
|
void PeekIEnd(BCMapCellInfo& aRefInfo,
|
|
uint32_t aRowIndex,
|
|
BCMapCellInfo& aAjaInfo);
|
|
|
|
void PeekBEnd(BCMapCellInfo& aRefInfo,
|
|
uint32_t aColIndex,
|
|
BCMapCellInfo& aAjaInfo);
|
|
|
|
bool IsNewRow() { return mIsNewRow; }
|
|
|
|
nsTableRowFrame* GetPrevRow() const { return mPrevRow; }
|
|
nsTableRowFrame* GetCurrentRow() const { return mRow; }
|
|
nsTableRowGroupFrame* GetCurrentRowGroup() const { return mRowGroup; }
|
|
|
|
int32_t mRowGroupStart;
|
|
int32_t mRowGroupEnd;
|
|
bool mAtEnd;
|
|
nsCellMap* mCellMap;
|
|
|
|
private:
|
|
bool SetNewRow(nsTableRowFrame* row = nullptr);
|
|
bool SetNewRowGroup(bool aFindFirstDamagedRow);
|
|
|
|
nsTableFrame* mTableFrame;
|
|
nsTableCellMap* mTableCellMap;
|
|
nsTableFrame::RowGroupArray mRowGroups;
|
|
nsTableRowGroupFrame* mRowGroup;
|
|
int32_t mRowGroupIndex;
|
|
uint32_t mNumTableRows;
|
|
nsTableRowFrame* mRow;
|
|
nsTableRowFrame* mPrevRow;
|
|
bool mIsNewRow;
|
|
int32_t mRowIndex;
|
|
uint32_t mNumTableCols;
|
|
int32_t mColIndex;
|
|
nsPoint mAreaStart; // These are not really points in the usual
|
|
nsPoint mAreaEnd; // sense; they're column/row coordinates
|
|
// in the cell map.
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
BCMapCellIterator::BCMapCellIterator(nsTableFrame* aTableFrame,
|
|
const TableArea& aDamageArea)
|
|
: mTableFrame(aTableFrame)
|
|
{
|
|
mTableCellMap = aTableFrame->GetCellMap();
|
|
|
|
mAreaStart.x = aDamageArea.StartCol();
|
|
mAreaStart.y = aDamageArea.StartRow();
|
|
mAreaEnd.x = aDamageArea.EndCol() - 1;
|
|
mAreaEnd.y = aDamageArea.EndRow() - 1;
|
|
|
|
mNumTableRows = mTableFrame->GetRowCount();
|
|
mRow = nullptr;
|
|
mRowIndex = 0;
|
|
mNumTableCols = mTableFrame->GetColCount();
|
|
mColIndex = 0;
|
|
mRowGroupIndex = -1;
|
|
|
|
// Get the ordered row groups
|
|
aTableFrame->OrderRowGroups(mRowGroups);
|
|
|
|
mAtEnd = true; // gets reset when First() is called
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
// fill fields that we need for border collapse computation on a given cell
|
|
void
|
|
BCMapCellInfo::SetInfo(nsTableRowFrame* aNewRow,
|
|
int32_t aColIndex,
|
|
BCCellData* aCellData,
|
|
BCMapCellIterator* aIter,
|
|
nsCellMap* aCellMap)
|
|
{
|
|
// fill the cell information
|
|
mCellData = aCellData;
|
|
mColIndex = aColIndex;
|
|
|
|
// initialize the row information if it was not previously set for cells in
|
|
// this row
|
|
mRowIndex = 0;
|
|
if (aNewRow) {
|
|
mStartRow = aNewRow;
|
|
mRowIndex = aNewRow->GetRowIndex();
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
// fill cell frame info and row information
|
|
mCell = nullptr;
|
|
mRowSpan = 1;
|
|
mColSpan = 1;
|
|
if (aCellData) {
|
|
mCell = static_cast<nsBCTableCellFrame*>(aCellData->GetCellFrame());
|
|
if (mCell) {
|
|
if (!mStartRow) {
|
|
mStartRow = mCell->GetTableRowFrame();
|
|
if (!mStartRow) ABORT0();
|
|
mRowIndex = mStartRow->GetRowIndex();
|
|
}
|
|
mColSpan = mTableFrame->GetEffectiveColSpan(*mCell, aCellMap);
|
|
mRowSpan = mTableFrame->GetEffectiveRowSpan(*mCell, aCellMap);
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
if (!mStartRow) {
|
|
mStartRow = aIter->GetCurrentRow();
|
|
}
|
|
if (1 == mRowSpan) {
|
|
mEndRow = mStartRow;
|
|
}
|
|
else {
|
|
mEndRow = mStartRow->GetNextRow();
|
|
if (mEndRow) {
|
|
for (int32_t span = 2; mEndRow && span < mRowSpan; span++) {
|
|
mEndRow = mEndRow->GetNextRow();
|
|
}
|
|
NS_ASSERTION(mEndRow, "spanned row not found");
|
|
}
|
|
else {
|
|
NS_ERROR("error in cell map");
|
|
mRowSpan = 1;
|
|
mEndRow = mStartRow;
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
// row group frame info
|
|
// try to reuse the rgStart and rgEnd from the iterator as calls to
|
|
// GetRowCount() are computationally expensive and should be avoided if
|
|
// possible
|
|
uint32_t rgStart = aIter->mRowGroupStart;
|
|
uint32_t rgEnd = aIter->mRowGroupEnd;
|
|
mRowGroup = mStartRow->GetTableRowGroupFrame();
|
|
if (mRowGroup != aIter->GetCurrentRowGroup()) {
|
|
rgStart = mRowGroup->GetStartRowIndex();
|
|
rgEnd = rgStart + mRowGroup->GetRowCount() - 1;
|
|
}
|
|
uint32_t rowIndex = mStartRow->GetRowIndex();
|
|
mRgAtStart = rgStart == rowIndex;
|
|
mRgAtEnd = rgEnd == rowIndex + mRowSpan - 1;
|
|
|
|
// col frame info
|
|
mStartCol = mTableFrame->GetColFrame(aColIndex);
|
|
if (!mStartCol) ABORT0();
|
|
|
|
mEndCol = mStartCol;
|
|
if (mColSpan > 1) {
|
|
nsTableColFrame* colFrame = mTableFrame->GetColFrame(aColIndex +
|
|
mColSpan -1);
|
|
if (!colFrame) ABORT0();
|
|
mEndCol = colFrame;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
// col group frame info
|
|
mColGroup = mStartCol->GetTableColGroupFrame();
|
|
int32_t cgStart = mColGroup->GetStartColumnIndex();
|
|
int32_t cgEnd = std::max(0, cgStart + mColGroup->GetColCount() - 1);
|
|
mCgAtStart = cgStart == aColIndex;
|
|
mCgAtEnd = cgEnd == aColIndex + mColSpan - 1;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
bool
|
|
BCMapCellIterator::SetNewRow(nsTableRowFrame* aRow)
|
|
{
|
|
mAtEnd = true;
|
|
mPrevRow = mRow;
|
|
if (aRow) {
|
|
mRow = aRow;
|
|
}
|
|
else if (mRow) {
|
|
mRow = mRow->GetNextRow();
|
|
}
|
|
if (mRow) {
|
|
mRowIndex = mRow->GetRowIndex();
|
|
// get to the first entry with an originating cell
|
|
int32_t rgRowIndex = mRowIndex - mRowGroupStart;
|
|
if (uint32_t(rgRowIndex) >= mCellMap->mRows.Length())
|
|
ABORT1(false);
|
|
const nsCellMap::CellDataArray& row = mCellMap->mRows[rgRowIndex];
|
|
|
|
for (mColIndex = mAreaStart.x; mColIndex <= mAreaEnd.x; mColIndex++) {
|
|
CellData* cellData = row.SafeElementAt(mColIndex);
|
|
if (!cellData) { // add a dead cell data
|
|
TableArea damageArea;
|
|
cellData = mCellMap->AppendCell(*mTableCellMap, nullptr, rgRowIndex,
|
|
false, 0, damageArea);
|
|
if (!cellData) ABORT1(false);
|
|
}
|
|
if (cellData && (cellData->IsOrig() || cellData->IsDead())) {
|
|
break;
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
mIsNewRow = true;
|
|
mAtEnd = false;
|
|
}
|
|
else ABORT1(false);
|
|
|
|
return !mAtEnd;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
bool
|
|
BCMapCellIterator::SetNewRowGroup(bool aFindFirstDamagedRow)
|
|
{
|
|
mAtEnd = true;
|
|
int32_t numRowGroups = mRowGroups.Length();
|
|
mCellMap = nullptr;
|
|
for (mRowGroupIndex++; mRowGroupIndex < numRowGroups; mRowGroupIndex++) {
|
|
mRowGroup = mRowGroups[mRowGroupIndex];
|
|
int32_t rowCount = mRowGroup->GetRowCount();
|
|
mRowGroupStart = mRowGroup->GetStartRowIndex();
|
|
mRowGroupEnd = mRowGroupStart + rowCount - 1;
|
|
if (rowCount > 0) {
|
|
mCellMap = mTableCellMap->GetMapFor(mRowGroup, mCellMap);
|
|
if (!mCellMap) ABORT1(false);
|
|
nsTableRowFrame* firstRow = mRowGroup->GetFirstRow();
|
|
if (aFindFirstDamagedRow) {
|
|
if ((mAreaStart.y >= mRowGroupStart) && (mAreaStart.y <= mRowGroupEnd)) {
|
|
// the damage area starts in the row group
|
|
if (aFindFirstDamagedRow) {
|
|
// find the correct first damaged row
|
|
int32_t numRows = mAreaStart.y - mRowGroupStart;
|
|
for (int32_t i = 0; i < numRows; i++) {
|
|
firstRow = firstRow->GetNextRow();
|
|
if (!firstRow) ABORT1(false);
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
else {
|
|
continue;
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
if (SetNewRow(firstRow)) { // sets mAtEnd
|
|
break;
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
return !mAtEnd;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
void
|
|
BCMapCellIterator::First(BCMapCellInfo& aMapInfo)
|
|
{
|
|
aMapInfo.ResetCellInfo();
|
|
|
|
SetNewRowGroup(true); // sets mAtEnd
|
|
while (!mAtEnd) {
|
|
if ((mAreaStart.y >= mRowGroupStart) && (mAreaStart.y <= mRowGroupEnd)) {
|
|
BCCellData* cellData =
|
|
static_cast<BCCellData*>(mCellMap->GetDataAt(mAreaStart.y -
|
|
mRowGroupStart,
|
|
mAreaStart.x));
|
|
if (cellData && (cellData->IsOrig() || cellData->IsDead())) {
|
|
aMapInfo.SetInfo(mRow, mAreaStart.x, cellData, this);
|
|
return;
|
|
}
|
|
else {
|
|
NS_ASSERTION(((0 == mAreaStart.x) && (mRowGroupStart == mAreaStart.y)) ,
|
|
"damage area expanded incorrectly");
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
SetNewRowGroup(true); // sets mAtEnd
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
void
|
|
BCMapCellIterator::Next(BCMapCellInfo& aMapInfo)
|
|
{
|
|
if (mAtEnd) ABORT0();
|
|
aMapInfo.ResetCellInfo();
|
|
|
|
mIsNewRow = false;
|
|
mColIndex++;
|
|
while ((mRowIndex <= mAreaEnd.y) && !mAtEnd) {
|
|
for (; mColIndex <= mAreaEnd.x; mColIndex++) {
|
|
int32_t rgRowIndex = mRowIndex - mRowGroupStart;
|
|
BCCellData* cellData =
|
|
static_cast<BCCellData*>(mCellMap->GetDataAt(rgRowIndex, mColIndex));
|
|
if (!cellData) { // add a dead cell data
|
|
TableArea damageArea;
|
|
cellData =
|
|
static_cast<BCCellData*>(mCellMap->AppendCell(*mTableCellMap, nullptr,
|
|
rgRowIndex, false, 0,
|
|
damageArea));
|
|
if (!cellData) ABORT0();
|
|
}
|
|
if (cellData && (cellData->IsOrig() || cellData->IsDead())) {
|
|
aMapInfo.SetInfo(mRow, mColIndex, cellData, this);
|
|
return;
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
if (mRowIndex >= mRowGroupEnd) {
|
|
SetNewRowGroup(false); // could set mAtEnd
|
|
}
|
|
else {
|
|
SetNewRow(); // could set mAtEnd
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
mAtEnd = true;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
void
|
|
BCMapCellIterator::PeekIEnd(BCMapCellInfo& aRefInfo,
|
|
uint32_t aRowIndex,
|
|
BCMapCellInfo& aAjaInfo)
|
|
{
|
|
aAjaInfo.ResetCellInfo();
|
|
int32_t colIndex = aRefInfo.mColIndex + aRefInfo.mColSpan;
|
|
uint32_t rgRowIndex = aRowIndex - mRowGroupStart;
|
|
|
|
BCCellData* cellData =
|
|
static_cast<BCCellData*>(mCellMap->GetDataAt(rgRowIndex, colIndex));
|
|
if (!cellData) { // add a dead cell data
|
|
NS_ASSERTION(colIndex < mTableCellMap->GetColCount(), "program error");
|
|
TableArea damageArea;
|
|
cellData =
|
|
static_cast<BCCellData*>(mCellMap->AppendCell(*mTableCellMap, nullptr,
|
|
rgRowIndex, false, 0,
|
|
damageArea));
|
|
if (!cellData) ABORT0();
|
|
}
|
|
nsTableRowFrame* row = nullptr;
|
|
if (cellData->IsRowSpan()) {
|
|
rgRowIndex -= cellData->GetRowSpanOffset();
|
|
cellData =
|
|
static_cast<BCCellData*>(mCellMap->GetDataAt(rgRowIndex, colIndex));
|
|
if (!cellData)
|
|
ABORT0();
|
|
}
|
|
else {
|
|
row = mRow;
|
|
}
|
|
aAjaInfo.SetInfo(row, colIndex, cellData, this);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
void
|
|
BCMapCellIterator::PeekBEnd(BCMapCellInfo& aRefInfo,
|
|
uint32_t aColIndex,
|
|
BCMapCellInfo& aAjaInfo)
|
|
{
|
|
aAjaInfo.ResetCellInfo();
|
|
int32_t rowIndex = aRefInfo.mRowIndex + aRefInfo.mRowSpan;
|
|
int32_t rgRowIndex = rowIndex - mRowGroupStart;
|
|
nsTableRowGroupFrame* rg = mRowGroup;
|
|
nsCellMap* cellMap = mCellMap;
|
|
nsTableRowFrame* nextRow = nullptr;
|
|
if (rowIndex > mRowGroupEnd) {
|
|
int32_t nextRgIndex = mRowGroupIndex;
|
|
do {
|
|
nextRgIndex++;
|
|
rg = mRowGroups.SafeElementAt(nextRgIndex);
|
|
if (rg) {
|
|
cellMap = mTableCellMap->GetMapFor(rg, cellMap); if (!cellMap) ABORT0();
|
|
rgRowIndex = 0;
|
|
nextRow = rg->GetFirstRow();
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
while (rg && !nextRow);
|
|
if(!rg) return;
|
|
}
|
|
else {
|
|
// get the row within the same row group
|
|
nextRow = mRow;
|
|
for (int32_t i = 0; i < aRefInfo.mRowSpan; i++) {
|
|
nextRow = nextRow->GetNextRow(); if (!nextRow) ABORT0();
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
BCCellData* cellData =
|
|
static_cast<BCCellData*>(cellMap->GetDataAt(rgRowIndex, aColIndex));
|
|
if (!cellData) { // add a dead cell data
|
|
NS_ASSERTION(rgRowIndex < cellMap->GetRowCount(), "program error");
|
|
TableArea damageArea;
|
|
cellData =
|
|
static_cast<BCCellData*>(cellMap->AppendCell(*mTableCellMap, nullptr,
|
|
rgRowIndex, false, 0,
|
|
damageArea));
|
|
if (!cellData) ABORT0();
|
|
}
|
|
if (cellData->IsColSpan()) {
|
|
aColIndex -= cellData->GetColSpanOffset();
|
|
cellData =
|
|
static_cast<BCCellData*>(cellMap->GetDataAt(rgRowIndex, aColIndex));
|
|
}
|
|
aAjaInfo.SetInfo(nextRow, aColIndex, cellData, this, cellMap);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
// Assign priorities to border styles. For example, styleToPriority(NS_STYLE_BORDER_STYLE_SOLID)
|
|
// will return the priority of NS_STYLE_BORDER_STYLE_SOLID.
|
|
static uint8_t styleToPriority[13] = { 0, // NS_STYLE_BORDER_STYLE_NONE
|
|
2, // NS_STYLE_BORDER_STYLE_GROOVE
|
|
4, // NS_STYLE_BORDER_STYLE_RIDGE
|
|
5, // NS_STYLE_BORDER_STYLE_DOTTED
|
|
6, // NS_STYLE_BORDER_STYLE_DASHED
|
|
7, // NS_STYLE_BORDER_STYLE_SOLID
|
|
8, // NS_STYLE_BORDER_STYLE_DOUBLE
|
|
1, // NS_STYLE_BORDER_STYLE_INSET
|
|
3, // NS_STYLE_BORDER_STYLE_OUTSET
|
|
9 };// NS_STYLE_BORDER_STYLE_HIDDEN
|
|
// priority rules follow CSS 2.1 spec
|
|
// 'hidden', 'double', 'solid', 'dashed', 'dotted', 'ridge', 'outset', 'groove',
|
|
// and the lowest: 'inset'. none is even weaker
|
|
#define CELL_CORNER true
|
|
|
|
/** return the border style, border color and optionally the width in
|
|
* pixel for a given frame and side
|
|
* @param aFrame - query the info for this frame
|
|
* @param aTableWM - the writing-mode of the frame
|
|
* @param aSide - the side of the frame
|
|
* @param aStyle - the border style
|
|
* @param aColor - the border color
|
|
* @param aWidth - the border width in px
|
|
*/
|
|
static void
|
|
GetColorAndStyle(const nsIFrame* aFrame,
|
|
WritingMode aTableWM,
|
|
LogicalSide aSide,
|
|
uint8_t* aStyle,
|
|
nscolor* aColor,
|
|
BCPixelSize* aWidth = nullptr)
|
|
{
|
|
NS_PRECONDITION(aFrame, "null frame");
|
|
NS_PRECONDITION(aStyle && aColor, "null argument");
|
|
// initialize out arg
|
|
*aColor = 0;
|
|
if (aWidth) {
|
|
*aWidth = 0;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
const nsStyleBorder* styleData = aFrame->StyleBorder();
|
|
mozilla::Side physicalSide = aTableWM.PhysicalSide(aSide);
|
|
*aStyle = styleData->GetBorderStyle(physicalSide);
|
|
|
|
if ((NS_STYLE_BORDER_STYLE_NONE == *aStyle) ||
|
|
(NS_STYLE_BORDER_STYLE_HIDDEN == *aStyle)) {
|
|
return;
|
|
}
|
|
*aColor = aFrame->StyleContext()->GetVisitedDependentColor(
|
|
nsCSSProps::SubpropertyEntryFor(eCSSProperty_border_color)[physicalSide]);
|
|
|
|
if (aWidth) {
|
|
nscoord width = styleData->GetComputedBorderWidth(physicalSide);
|
|
*aWidth = nsPresContext::AppUnitsToIntCSSPixels(width);
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/** coerce the paint style as required by CSS2.1
|
|
* @param aFrame - query the info for this frame
|
|
* @param aTableWM - the writing mode of the frame
|
|
* @param aSide - the side of the frame
|
|
* @param aStyle - the border style
|
|
* @param aColor - the border color
|
|
*/
|
|
static void
|
|
GetPaintStyleInfo(const nsIFrame* aFrame,
|
|
WritingMode aTableWM,
|
|
LogicalSide aSide,
|
|
uint8_t* aStyle,
|
|
nscolor* aColor)
|
|
{
|
|
GetColorAndStyle(aFrame, aTableWM, aSide, aStyle, aColor);
|
|
if (NS_STYLE_BORDER_STYLE_INSET == *aStyle) {
|
|
*aStyle = NS_STYLE_BORDER_STYLE_RIDGE;
|
|
} else if (NS_STYLE_BORDER_STYLE_OUTSET == *aStyle) {
|
|
*aStyle = NS_STYLE_BORDER_STYLE_GROOVE;
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
class nsDelayedCalcBCBorders : public nsRunnable {
|
|
public:
|
|
explicit nsDelayedCalcBCBorders(nsIFrame* aFrame) :
|
|
mFrame(aFrame) {}
|
|
|
|
NS_IMETHOD Run() override {
|
|
if (mFrame) {
|
|
nsTableFrame* tableFrame = static_cast <nsTableFrame*>(mFrame.GetFrame());
|
|
if (tableFrame->NeedToCalcBCBorders()) {
|
|
tableFrame->CalcBCBorders();
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
return NS_OK;
|
|
}
|
|
private:
|
|
nsWeakFrame mFrame;
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
bool
|
|
nsTableFrame::BCRecalcNeeded(nsStyleContext* aOldStyleContext,
|
|
nsStyleContext* aNewStyleContext)
|
|
{
|
|
// Attention: the old style context is the one we're forgetting,
|
|
// and hence possibly completely bogus for GetStyle* purposes.
|
|
// We use PeekStyleData instead.
|
|
|
|
const nsStyleBorder* oldStyleData = aOldStyleContext->PeekStyleBorder();
|
|
if (!oldStyleData)
|
|
return false;
|
|
|
|
const nsStyleBorder* newStyleData = aNewStyleContext->StyleBorder();
|
|
nsChangeHint change = newStyleData->CalcDifference(*oldStyleData);
|
|
if (!change)
|
|
return false;
|
|
if (change & nsChangeHint_NeedReflow)
|
|
return true; // the caller only needs to mark the bc damage area
|
|
if (change & nsChangeHint_RepaintFrame) {
|
|
// we need to recompute the borders and the caller needs to mark
|
|
// the bc damage area
|
|
// XXX In principle this should only be necessary for border style changes
|
|
// However the bc painting code tries to maximize the drawn border segments
|
|
// so it stores in the cellmap where a new border segment starts and this
|
|
// introduces a unwanted cellmap data dependence on color
|
|
nsCOMPtr<nsIRunnable> evt = new nsDelayedCalcBCBorders(this);
|
|
NS_DispatchToCurrentThread(evt);
|
|
return true;
|
|
}
|
|
return false;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
// Compare two border segments, this comparison depends whether the two
|
|
// segments meet at a corner and whether the second segment is inline-dir.
|
|
// The return value is whichever of aBorder1 or aBorder2 dominates.
|
|
static const BCCellBorder&
|
|
CompareBorders(bool aIsCorner, // Pass true for corner calculations
|
|
const BCCellBorder& aBorder1,
|
|
const BCCellBorder& aBorder2,
|
|
bool aSecondIsInlineDir,
|
|
bool* aFirstDominates = nullptr)
|
|
{
|
|
bool firstDominates = true;
|
|
|
|
if (NS_STYLE_BORDER_STYLE_HIDDEN == aBorder1.style) {
|
|
firstDominates = (aIsCorner) ? false : true;
|
|
}
|
|
else if (NS_STYLE_BORDER_STYLE_HIDDEN == aBorder2.style) {
|
|
firstDominates = (aIsCorner) ? true : false;
|
|
}
|
|
else if (aBorder1.width < aBorder2.width) {
|
|
firstDominates = false;
|
|
}
|
|
else if (aBorder1.width == aBorder2.width) {
|
|
if (styleToPriority[aBorder1.style] < styleToPriority[aBorder2.style]) {
|
|
firstDominates = false;
|
|
}
|
|
else if (styleToPriority[aBorder1.style] == styleToPriority[aBorder2.style]) {
|
|
if (aBorder1.owner == aBorder2.owner) {
|
|
firstDominates = !aSecondIsInlineDir;
|
|
}
|
|
else if (aBorder1.owner < aBorder2.owner) {
|
|
firstDominates = false;
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
if (aFirstDominates)
|
|
*aFirstDominates = firstDominates;
|
|
|
|
if (firstDominates)
|
|
return aBorder1;
|
|
return aBorder2;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/** calc the dominant border by considering the table, row/col group, row/col,
|
|
* cell.
|
|
* Depending on whether the side is block-dir or inline-dir and whether
|
|
* adjacent frames are taken into account the ownership of a single border
|
|
* segment is defined. The return value is the dominating border
|
|
* The cellmap stores only bstart and istart borders for each cellmap position.
|
|
* If the cell border is owned by the cell that is istart-wards of the border
|
|
* it will be an adjacent owner aka eAjaCellOwner. See celldata.h for the other
|
|
* scenarios with a adjacent owner.
|
|
* @param xxxFrame - the frame for style information, might be zero if
|
|
* it should not be considered
|
|
* @param aTableWM - the writing mode of the frame
|
|
* @param aSide - side of the frames that should be considered
|
|
* @param aAja - the border comparison takes place from the point of
|
|
* a frame that is adjacent to the cellmap entry, for
|
|
* when a cell owns its lower border it will be the
|
|
* adjacent owner as in the cellmap only bstart and
|
|
* istart borders are stored.
|
|
*/
|
|
static BCCellBorder
|
|
CompareBorders(const nsIFrame* aTableFrame,
|
|
const nsIFrame* aColGroupFrame,
|
|
const nsIFrame* aColFrame,
|
|
const nsIFrame* aRowGroupFrame,
|
|
const nsIFrame* aRowFrame,
|
|
const nsIFrame* aCellFrame,
|
|
WritingMode aTableWM,
|
|
LogicalSide aSide,
|
|
bool aAja)
|
|
{
|
|
BCCellBorder border, tempBorder;
|
|
bool inlineAxis = IsBlock(aSide);
|
|
|
|
// start with the table as dominant if present
|
|
if (aTableFrame) {
|
|
GetColorAndStyle(aTableFrame, aTableWM, aSide,
|
|
&border.style, &border.color, &border.width);
|
|
border.owner = eTableOwner;
|
|
if (NS_STYLE_BORDER_STYLE_HIDDEN == border.style) {
|
|
return border;
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
// see if the colgroup is dominant
|
|
if (aColGroupFrame) {
|
|
GetColorAndStyle(aColGroupFrame, aTableWM, aSide,
|
|
&tempBorder.style, &tempBorder.color, &tempBorder.width);
|
|
tempBorder.owner = aAja && !inlineAxis ? eAjaColGroupOwner : eColGroupOwner;
|
|
// pass here and below false for aSecondIsInlineDir as it is only used for corner calculations.
|
|
border = CompareBorders(!CELL_CORNER, border, tempBorder, false);
|
|
if (NS_STYLE_BORDER_STYLE_HIDDEN == border.style) {
|
|
return border;
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
// see if the col is dominant
|
|
if (aColFrame) {
|
|
GetColorAndStyle(aColFrame, aTableWM, aSide,
|
|
&tempBorder.style, &tempBorder.color, &tempBorder.width);
|
|
tempBorder.owner = aAja && !inlineAxis ? eAjaColOwner : eColOwner;
|
|
border = CompareBorders(!CELL_CORNER, border, tempBorder, false);
|
|
if (NS_STYLE_BORDER_STYLE_HIDDEN == border.style) {
|
|
return border;
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
// see if the rowgroup is dominant
|
|
if (aRowGroupFrame) {
|
|
GetColorAndStyle(aRowGroupFrame, aTableWM, aSide,
|
|
&tempBorder.style, &tempBorder.color, &tempBorder.width);
|
|
tempBorder.owner = aAja && inlineAxis ? eAjaRowGroupOwner : eRowGroupOwner;
|
|
border = CompareBorders(!CELL_CORNER, border, tempBorder, false);
|
|
if (NS_STYLE_BORDER_STYLE_HIDDEN == border.style) {
|
|
return border;
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
// see if the row is dominant
|
|
if (aRowFrame) {
|
|
GetColorAndStyle(aRowFrame, aTableWM, aSide,
|
|
&tempBorder.style, &tempBorder.color, &tempBorder.width);
|
|
tempBorder.owner = aAja && inlineAxis ? eAjaRowOwner : eRowOwner;
|
|
border = CompareBorders(!CELL_CORNER, border, tempBorder, false);
|
|
if (NS_STYLE_BORDER_STYLE_HIDDEN == border.style) {
|
|
return border;
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
// see if the cell is dominant
|
|
if (aCellFrame) {
|
|
GetColorAndStyle(aCellFrame, aTableWM, aSide,
|
|
&tempBorder.style, &tempBorder.color, &tempBorder.width);
|
|
tempBorder.owner = aAja ? eAjaCellOwner : eCellOwner;
|
|
border = CompareBorders(!CELL_CORNER, border, tempBorder, false);
|
|
}
|
|
return border;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
static bool
|
|
Perpendicular(mozilla::LogicalSide aSide1,
|
|
mozilla::LogicalSide aSide2)
|
|
{
|
|
return IsInline(aSide1) != IsInline(aSide2);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
// XXX allocate this as number-of-cols+1 instead of number-of-cols+1 * number-of-rows+1
|
|
struct BCCornerInfo
|
|
{
|
|
BCCornerInfo() { ownerColor = 0; ownerWidth = subWidth = ownerElem = subSide =
|
|
subElem = hasDashDot = numSegs = bevel = 0; ownerSide = eLogicalSideBStart;
|
|
ownerStyle = 0xFF; subStyle = NS_STYLE_BORDER_STYLE_SOLID; }
|
|
void Set(mozilla::LogicalSide aSide,
|
|
BCCellBorder border);
|
|
|
|
void Update(mozilla::LogicalSide aSide,
|
|
BCCellBorder border);
|
|
|
|
nscolor ownerColor; // color of borderOwner
|
|
uint16_t ownerWidth; // pixel width of borderOwner
|
|
uint16_t subWidth; // pixel width of the largest border intersecting the border perpendicular
|
|
// to ownerSide
|
|
uint32_t ownerSide:2; // LogicalSide (e.g eLogicalSideBStart, etc) of the border
|
|
// owning the corner relative to the corner
|
|
uint32_t ownerElem:3; // elem type (e.g. eTable, eGroup, etc) owning the corner
|
|
uint32_t ownerStyle:8; // border style of ownerElem
|
|
uint32_t subSide:2; // side of border with subWidth relative to the corner
|
|
uint32_t subElem:3; // elem type (e.g. eTable, eGroup, etc) of sub owner
|
|
uint32_t subStyle:8; // border style of subElem
|
|
uint32_t hasDashDot:1; // does a dashed, dotted segment enter the corner, they cannot be beveled
|
|
uint32_t numSegs:3; // number of segments entering corner
|
|
uint32_t bevel:1; // is the corner beveled (uses the above two fields together with subWidth)
|
|
uint32_t unused:1;
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
void
|
|
BCCornerInfo::Set(mozilla::LogicalSide aSide,
|
|
BCCellBorder aBorder)
|
|
{
|
|
ownerElem = aBorder.owner;
|
|
ownerStyle = aBorder.style;
|
|
ownerWidth = aBorder.width;
|
|
ownerColor = aBorder.color;
|
|
ownerSide = aSide;
|
|
hasDashDot = 0;
|
|
numSegs = 0;
|
|
if (aBorder.width > 0) {
|
|
numSegs++;
|
|
hasDashDot = (NS_STYLE_BORDER_STYLE_DASHED == aBorder.style) ||
|
|
(NS_STYLE_BORDER_STYLE_DOTTED == aBorder.style);
|
|
}
|
|
bevel = 0;
|
|
subWidth = 0;
|
|
// the following will get set later
|
|
subSide = IsInline(aSide) ? eLogicalSideBStart : eLogicalSideIStart;
|
|
subElem = eTableOwner;
|
|
subStyle = NS_STYLE_BORDER_STYLE_SOLID;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
void
|
|
BCCornerInfo::Update(mozilla::LogicalSide aSide,
|
|
BCCellBorder aBorder)
|
|
{
|
|
bool existingWins = false;
|
|
if (0xFF == ownerStyle) { // initial value indiating that it hasn't been set yet
|
|
Set(aSide, aBorder);
|
|
}
|
|
else {
|
|
bool isInline = IsInline(aSide); // relative to the corner
|
|
BCCellBorder oldBorder, tempBorder;
|
|
oldBorder.owner = (BCBorderOwner) ownerElem;
|
|
oldBorder.style = ownerStyle;
|
|
oldBorder.width = ownerWidth;
|
|
oldBorder.color = ownerColor;
|
|
|
|
LogicalSide oldSide = LogicalSide(ownerSide);
|
|
|
|
tempBorder = CompareBorders(CELL_CORNER, oldBorder, aBorder, isInline, &existingWins);
|
|
|
|
ownerElem = tempBorder.owner;
|
|
ownerStyle = tempBorder.style;
|
|
ownerWidth = tempBorder.width;
|
|
ownerColor = tempBorder.color;
|
|
if (existingWins) { // existing corner is dominant
|
|
if (::Perpendicular(LogicalSide(ownerSide), aSide)) {
|
|
// see if the new sub info replaces the old
|
|
BCCellBorder subBorder;
|
|
subBorder.owner = (BCBorderOwner) subElem;
|
|
subBorder.style = subStyle;
|
|
subBorder.width = subWidth;
|
|
subBorder.color = 0; // we are not interested in subBorder color
|
|
bool firstWins;
|
|
|
|
tempBorder = CompareBorders(CELL_CORNER, subBorder, aBorder, isInline, &firstWins);
|
|
|
|
subElem = tempBorder.owner;
|
|
subStyle = tempBorder.style;
|
|
subWidth = tempBorder.width;
|
|
if (!firstWins) {
|
|
subSide = aSide;
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
else { // input args are dominant
|
|
ownerSide = aSide;
|
|
if (::Perpendicular(oldSide, LogicalSide(ownerSide))) {
|
|
subElem = oldBorder.owner;
|
|
subStyle = oldBorder.style;
|
|
subWidth = oldBorder.width;
|
|
subSide = oldSide;
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
if (aBorder.width > 0) {
|
|
numSegs++;
|
|
if (!hasDashDot && ((NS_STYLE_BORDER_STYLE_DASHED == aBorder.style) ||
|
|
(NS_STYLE_BORDER_STYLE_DOTTED == aBorder.style))) {
|
|
hasDashDot = 1;
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
// bevel the corner if only two perpendicular non dashed/dotted segments enter the corner
|
|
bevel = (2 == numSegs) && (subWidth > 1) && (0 == hasDashDot);
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
struct BCCorners
|
|
{
|
|
BCCorners(int32_t aNumCorners,
|
|
int32_t aStartIndex);
|
|
|
|
~BCCorners() { delete [] corners; }
|
|
|
|
BCCornerInfo& operator [](int32_t i) const
|
|
{ NS_ASSERTION((i >= startIndex) && (i <= endIndex), "program error");
|
|
return corners[clamped(i, startIndex, endIndex) - startIndex]; }
|
|
|
|
int32_t startIndex;
|
|
int32_t endIndex;
|
|
BCCornerInfo* corners;
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
BCCorners::BCCorners(int32_t aNumCorners,
|
|
int32_t aStartIndex)
|
|
{
|
|
NS_ASSERTION((aNumCorners > 0) && (aStartIndex >= 0), "program error");
|
|
startIndex = aStartIndex;
|
|
endIndex = aStartIndex + aNumCorners - 1;
|
|
corners = new BCCornerInfo[aNumCorners];
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
struct BCCellBorders
|
|
{
|
|
BCCellBorders(int32_t aNumBorders,
|
|
int32_t aStartIndex);
|
|
|
|
~BCCellBorders() { delete [] borders; }
|
|
|
|
BCCellBorder& operator [](int32_t i) const
|
|
{ NS_ASSERTION((i >= startIndex) && (i <= endIndex), "program error");
|
|
return borders[clamped(i, startIndex, endIndex) - startIndex]; }
|
|
|
|
int32_t startIndex;
|
|
int32_t endIndex;
|
|
BCCellBorder* borders;
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
BCCellBorders::BCCellBorders(int32_t aNumBorders,
|
|
int32_t aStartIndex)
|
|
{
|
|
NS_ASSERTION((aNumBorders > 0) && (aStartIndex >= 0), "program error");
|
|
startIndex = aStartIndex;
|
|
endIndex = aStartIndex + aNumBorders - 1;
|
|
borders = new BCCellBorder[aNumBorders];
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
// this function sets the new border properties and returns true if the border
|
|
// segment will start a new segment and not be accumulated into the previous
|
|
// segment.
|
|
static bool
|
|
SetBorder(const BCCellBorder& aNewBorder,
|
|
BCCellBorder& aBorder)
|
|
{
|
|
bool changed = (aNewBorder.style != aBorder.style) ||
|
|
(aNewBorder.width != aBorder.width) ||
|
|
(aNewBorder.color != aBorder.color);
|
|
aBorder.color = aNewBorder.color;
|
|
aBorder.width = aNewBorder.width;
|
|
aBorder.style = aNewBorder.style;
|
|
aBorder.owner = aNewBorder.owner;
|
|
|
|
return changed;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
// this function will set the inline-dir border. It will return true if the
|
|
// existing segment will not be continued. Having a block-dir owner of a corner
|
|
// should also start a new segment.
|
|
static bool
|
|
SetInlineDirBorder(const BCCellBorder& aNewBorder,
|
|
const BCCornerInfo& aCorner,
|
|
BCCellBorder& aBorder)
|
|
{
|
|
bool startSeg = ::SetBorder(aNewBorder, aBorder);
|
|
if (!startSeg) {
|
|
startSeg = !IsInline(LogicalSide(aCorner.ownerSide));
|
|
}
|
|
return startSeg;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
// Make the damage area larger on the top and bottom by at least one row and on the left and right
|
|
// at least one column. This is done so that adjacent elements are part of the border calculations.
|
|
// The extra segments and borders outside the actual damage area will not be updated in the cell map,
|
|
// because they in turn would need info from adjacent segments outside the damage area to be accurate.
|
|
void
|
|
nsTableFrame::ExpandBCDamageArea(TableArea& aArea) const
|
|
{
|
|
int32_t numRows = GetRowCount();
|
|
int32_t numCols = GetColCount();
|
|
|
|
int32_t dStartX = aArea.StartCol();
|
|
int32_t dEndX = aArea.EndCol() - 1;
|
|
int32_t dStartY = aArea.StartRow();
|
|
int32_t dEndY = aArea.EndRow() - 1;
|
|
|
|
// expand the damage area in each direction
|
|
if (dStartX > 0) {
|
|
dStartX--;
|
|
}
|
|
if (dEndX < (numCols - 1)) {
|
|
dEndX++;
|
|
}
|
|
if (dStartY > 0) {
|
|
dStartY--;
|
|
}
|
|
if (dEndY < (numRows - 1)) {
|
|
dEndY++;
|
|
}
|
|
// Check the damage area so that there are no cells spanning in or out. If there are any then
|
|
// make the damage area as big as the table, similarly to the way the cell map decides whether
|
|
// to rebuild versus expand. This could be optimized to expand to the smallest area that contains
|
|
// no spanners, but it may not be worth the effort in general, and it would need to be done in the
|
|
// cell map as well.
|
|
bool haveSpanner = false;
|
|
if ((dStartX > 0) || (dEndX < (numCols - 1)) || (dStartY > 0) || (dEndY < (numRows - 1))) {
|
|
nsTableCellMap* tableCellMap = GetCellMap(); if (!tableCellMap) ABORT0();
|
|
// Get the ordered row groups
|
|
RowGroupArray rowGroups;
|
|
OrderRowGroups(rowGroups);
|
|
|
|
// Scope outside loop to be used as hint.
|
|
nsCellMap* cellMap = nullptr;
|
|
for (uint32_t rgIdx = 0; rgIdx < rowGroups.Length(); rgIdx++) {
|
|
nsTableRowGroupFrame* rgFrame = rowGroups[rgIdx];
|
|
int32_t rgStartY = rgFrame->GetStartRowIndex();
|
|
int32_t rgEndY = rgStartY + rgFrame->GetRowCount() - 1;
|
|
if (dEndY < rgStartY)
|
|
break;
|
|
cellMap = tableCellMap->GetMapFor(rgFrame, cellMap);
|
|
if (!cellMap) ABORT0();
|
|
// check for spanners from above and below
|
|
if ((dStartY > 0) && (dStartY >= rgStartY) && (dStartY <= rgEndY)) {
|
|
if (uint32_t(dStartY - rgStartY) >= cellMap->mRows.Length())
|
|
ABORT0();
|
|
const nsCellMap::CellDataArray& row =
|
|
cellMap->mRows[dStartY - rgStartY];
|
|
for (int32_t x = dStartX; x <= dEndX; x++) {
|
|
CellData* cellData = row.SafeElementAt(x);
|
|
if (cellData && (cellData->IsRowSpan())) {
|
|
haveSpanner = true;
|
|
break;
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
if (dEndY < rgEndY) {
|
|
if (uint32_t(dEndY + 1 - rgStartY) >= cellMap->mRows.Length())
|
|
ABORT0();
|
|
const nsCellMap::CellDataArray& row2 =
|
|
cellMap->mRows[dEndY + 1 - rgStartY];
|
|
for (int32_t x = dStartX; x <= dEndX; x++) {
|
|
CellData* cellData = row2.SafeElementAt(x);
|
|
if (cellData && (cellData->IsRowSpan())) {
|
|
haveSpanner = true;
|
|
break;
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
// check for spanners on the left and right
|
|
int32_t iterStartY = -1;
|
|
int32_t iterEndY = -1;
|
|
if ((dStartY >= rgStartY) && (dStartY <= rgEndY)) {
|
|
// the damage area starts in the row group
|
|
iterStartY = dStartY;
|
|
iterEndY = std::min(dEndY, rgEndY);
|
|
}
|
|
else if ((dEndY >= rgStartY) && (dEndY <= rgEndY)) {
|
|
// the damage area ends in the row group
|
|
iterStartY = rgStartY;
|
|
iterEndY = dEndY;
|
|
}
|
|
else if ((rgStartY >= dStartY) && (rgEndY <= dEndY)) {
|
|
// the damage area contains the row group
|
|
iterStartY = rgStartY;
|
|
iterEndY = rgEndY;
|
|
}
|
|
if ((iterStartY >= 0) && (iterEndY >= 0)) {
|
|
for (int32_t y = iterStartY; y <= iterEndY; y++) {
|
|
if (uint32_t(y - rgStartY) >= cellMap->mRows.Length())
|
|
ABORT0();
|
|
const nsCellMap::CellDataArray& row =
|
|
cellMap->mRows[y - rgStartY];
|
|
CellData* cellData = row.SafeElementAt(dStartX);
|
|
if (cellData && (cellData->IsColSpan())) {
|
|
haveSpanner = true;
|
|
break;
|
|
}
|
|
if (dEndX < (numCols - 1)) {
|
|
cellData = row.SafeElementAt(dEndX + 1);
|
|
if (cellData && (cellData->IsColSpan())) {
|
|
haveSpanner = true;
|
|
break;
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
if (haveSpanner) {
|
|
// make the damage area the whole table
|
|
aArea.StartCol() = 0;
|
|
aArea.StartRow() = 0;
|
|
aArea.ColCount() = numCols;
|
|
aArea.RowCount() = numRows;
|
|
}
|
|
else {
|
|
aArea.StartCol() = dStartX;
|
|
aArea.StartRow() = dStartY;
|
|
aArea.ColCount() = 1 + dEndX - dStartX;
|
|
aArea.RowCount() = 1 + dEndY - dStartY;
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
#define ADJACENT true
|
|
#define INLINE_DIR true
|
|
|
|
void
|
|
BCMapCellInfo::SetTableBStartIStartContBCBorder()
|
|
{
|
|
BCCellBorder currentBorder;
|
|
//calculate continuous top first row & rowgroup border: special case
|
|
//because it must include the table in the collapse
|
|
if (mStartRow) {
|
|
currentBorder = CompareBorders(mTableFrame, nullptr, nullptr, mRowGroup,
|
|
mStartRow, nullptr, mTableWM,
|
|
eLogicalSideBStart, !ADJACENT);
|
|
mStartRow->SetContinuousBCBorderWidth(eLogicalSideBStart,
|
|
currentBorder.width);
|
|
}
|
|
if (mCgAtEnd && mColGroup) {
|
|
//calculate continuous top colgroup border once per colgroup
|
|
currentBorder = CompareBorders(mTableFrame, mColGroup, nullptr, mRowGroup,
|
|
mStartRow, nullptr, mTableWM,
|
|
eLogicalSideBStart, !ADJACENT);
|
|
mColGroup->SetContinuousBCBorderWidth(eLogicalSideBStart,
|
|
currentBorder.width);
|
|
}
|
|
if (0 == mColIndex) {
|
|
currentBorder = CompareBorders(mTableFrame, mColGroup, mStartCol, nullptr,
|
|
nullptr, nullptr, mTableWM,
|
|
eLogicalSideIStart, !ADJACENT);
|
|
mTableFrame->SetContinuousIStartBCBorderWidth(currentBorder.width);
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
void
|
|
BCMapCellInfo::SetRowGroupIStartContBCBorder()
|
|
{
|
|
BCCellBorder currentBorder;
|
|
//get row group continuous borders
|
|
if (mRgAtEnd && mRowGroup) { //once per row group, so check for bottom
|
|
currentBorder = CompareBorders(mTableFrame, mColGroup, mStartCol,
|
|
mRowGroup, nullptr, nullptr, mTableWM,
|
|
eLogicalSideIStart, !ADJACENT);
|
|
mRowGroup->SetContinuousBCBorderWidth(eLogicalSideIStart,
|
|
currentBorder.width);
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
void
|
|
BCMapCellInfo::SetRowGroupIEndContBCBorder()
|
|
{
|
|
BCCellBorder currentBorder;
|
|
//get row group continuous borders
|
|
if (mRgAtEnd && mRowGroup) { //once per mRowGroup, so check for bottom
|
|
currentBorder = CompareBorders(mTableFrame, mColGroup, mEndCol, mRowGroup,
|
|
nullptr, nullptr, mTableWM, eLogicalSideIEnd,
|
|
ADJACENT);
|
|
mRowGroup->SetContinuousBCBorderWidth(eLogicalSideIEnd,
|
|
currentBorder.width);
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
void
|
|
BCMapCellInfo::SetColumnBStartIEndContBCBorder()
|
|
{
|
|
BCCellBorder currentBorder;
|
|
//calculate column continuous borders
|
|
//we only need to do this once, so we'll do it only on the first row
|
|
currentBorder = CompareBorders(mTableFrame, mCurrentColGroupFrame,
|
|
mCurrentColFrame, mRowGroup, mStartRow,
|
|
nullptr, mTableWM, eLogicalSideBStart,
|
|
!ADJACENT);
|
|
mCurrentColFrame->SetContinuousBCBorderWidth(eLogicalSideBStart,
|
|
currentBorder.width);
|
|
if (mNumTableCols == GetCellEndColIndex() + 1) {
|
|
currentBorder = CompareBorders(mTableFrame, mCurrentColGroupFrame,
|
|
mCurrentColFrame, nullptr, nullptr, nullptr,
|
|
mTableWM, eLogicalSideIEnd, !ADJACENT);
|
|
}
|
|
else {
|
|
currentBorder = CompareBorders(nullptr, mCurrentColGroupFrame,
|
|
mCurrentColFrame, nullptr,nullptr, nullptr,
|
|
mTableWM, eLogicalSideIEnd, !ADJACENT);
|
|
}
|
|
mCurrentColFrame->SetContinuousBCBorderWidth(eLogicalSideIEnd,
|
|
currentBorder.width);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
void
|
|
BCMapCellInfo::SetColumnBEndContBCBorder()
|
|
{
|
|
BCCellBorder currentBorder;
|
|
//get col continuous border
|
|
currentBorder = CompareBorders(mTableFrame, mCurrentColGroupFrame,
|
|
mCurrentColFrame, mRowGroup, mEndRow,
|
|
nullptr, mTableWM, eLogicalSideBEnd, ADJACENT);
|
|
mCurrentColFrame->SetContinuousBCBorderWidth(eLogicalSideBEnd,
|
|
currentBorder.width);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
void
|
|
BCMapCellInfo::SetColGroupBEndContBCBorder()
|
|
{
|
|
BCCellBorder currentBorder;
|
|
if (mColGroup) {
|
|
currentBorder = CompareBorders(mTableFrame, mColGroup, nullptr, mRowGroup,
|
|
mEndRow, nullptr, mTableWM,
|
|
eLogicalSideBEnd, ADJACENT);
|
|
mColGroup->SetContinuousBCBorderWidth(eLogicalSideBEnd, currentBorder.width);
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
void
|
|
BCMapCellInfo::SetRowGroupBEndContBCBorder()
|
|
{
|
|
BCCellBorder currentBorder;
|
|
if (mRowGroup) {
|
|
currentBorder = CompareBorders(mTableFrame, nullptr, nullptr, mRowGroup,
|
|
mEndRow, nullptr, mTableWM,
|
|
eLogicalSideBEnd, ADJACENT);
|
|
mRowGroup->SetContinuousBCBorderWidth(eLogicalSideBEnd, currentBorder.width);
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
void
|
|
BCMapCellInfo::SetInnerRowGroupBEndContBCBorder(const nsIFrame* aNextRowGroup,
|
|
nsTableRowFrame* aNextRow)
|
|
{
|
|
BCCellBorder currentBorder, adjacentBorder;
|
|
|
|
const nsIFrame* rowgroup = mRgAtEnd ? mRowGroup : nullptr;
|
|
currentBorder = CompareBorders(nullptr, nullptr, nullptr, rowgroup, mEndRow,
|
|
nullptr, mTableWM, eLogicalSideBEnd, ADJACENT);
|
|
|
|
adjacentBorder = CompareBorders(nullptr, nullptr, nullptr, aNextRowGroup,
|
|
aNextRow, nullptr, mTableWM, eLogicalSideBStart,
|
|
!ADJACENT);
|
|
currentBorder = CompareBorders(false, currentBorder, adjacentBorder,
|
|
INLINE_DIR);
|
|
if (aNextRow) {
|
|
aNextRow->SetContinuousBCBorderWidth(eLogicalSideBStart,
|
|
currentBorder.width);
|
|
}
|
|
if (mRgAtEnd && mRowGroup) {
|
|
mRowGroup->SetContinuousBCBorderWidth(eLogicalSideBEnd, currentBorder.width);
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
void
|
|
BCMapCellInfo::SetRowIStartContBCBorder()
|
|
{
|
|
//get row continuous borders
|
|
if (mCurrentRowFrame) {
|
|
BCCellBorder currentBorder;
|
|
currentBorder = CompareBorders(mTableFrame, mColGroup, mStartCol,
|
|
mRowGroup, mCurrentRowFrame, nullptr,
|
|
mTableWM, eLogicalSideIStart, !ADJACENT);
|
|
mCurrentRowFrame->SetContinuousBCBorderWidth(eLogicalSideIStart,
|
|
currentBorder.width);
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
void
|
|
BCMapCellInfo::SetRowIEndContBCBorder()
|
|
{
|
|
if (mCurrentRowFrame) {
|
|
BCCellBorder currentBorder;
|
|
currentBorder = CompareBorders(mTableFrame, mColGroup, mEndCol, mRowGroup,
|
|
mCurrentRowFrame, nullptr, mTableWM,
|
|
eLogicalSideIEnd, ADJACENT);
|
|
mCurrentRowFrame->SetContinuousBCBorderWidth(eLogicalSideIEnd,
|
|
currentBorder.width);
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
void
|
|
BCMapCellInfo::SetTableBStartBorderWidth(BCPixelSize aWidth)
|
|
{
|
|
mTableBCData->mBStartBorderWidth = std::max(mTableBCData->mBStartBorderWidth,
|
|
aWidth);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
void
|
|
BCMapCellInfo::SetTableIStartBorderWidth(int32_t aRowB, BCPixelSize aWidth)
|
|
{
|
|
// update the iStart first cell border
|
|
if (aRowB == 0) {
|
|
mTableBCData->mIStartCellBorderWidth = aWidth;
|
|
}
|
|
mTableBCData->mIStartBorderWidth = std::max(mTableBCData->mIStartBorderWidth,
|
|
aWidth);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
void
|
|
BCMapCellInfo::SetTableIEndBorderWidth(int32_t aRowB, BCPixelSize aWidth)
|
|
{
|
|
// update the iEnd first cell border
|
|
if (aRowB == 0) {
|
|
mTableBCData->mIEndCellBorderWidth = aWidth;
|
|
}
|
|
mTableBCData->mIEndBorderWidth = std::max(mTableBCData->mIEndBorderWidth,
|
|
aWidth);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
void
|
|
BCMapCellInfo::SetIEndBorderWidths(BCPixelSize aWidth)
|
|
{
|
|
// update the borders of the cells and cols affected
|
|
if (mCell) {
|
|
mCell->SetBorderWidth(eLogicalSideIEnd, std::max(aWidth,
|
|
mCell->GetBorderWidth(eLogicalSideIEnd)));
|
|
}
|
|
if (mEndCol) {
|
|
BCPixelSize half = BC_BORDER_START_HALF(aWidth);
|
|
mEndCol->SetIEndBorderWidth(
|
|
std::max(nscoord(half), mEndCol->GetIEndBorderWidth()));
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
void
|
|
BCMapCellInfo::SetBEndBorderWidths(BCPixelSize aWidth)
|
|
{
|
|
// update the borders of the affected cells and rows
|
|
if (mCell) {
|
|
mCell->SetBorderWidth(eLogicalSideBEnd, std::max(aWidth,
|
|
mCell->GetBorderWidth(eLogicalSideBEnd)));
|
|
}
|
|
if (mEndRow) {
|
|
BCPixelSize half = BC_BORDER_START_HALF(aWidth);
|
|
mEndRow->SetBEndBCBorderWidth(
|
|
std::max(nscoord(half), mEndRow->GetBEndBCBorderWidth()));
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
void
|
|
BCMapCellInfo::SetBStartBorderWidths(BCPixelSize aWidth)
|
|
{
|
|
if (mCell) {
|
|
mCell->SetBorderWidth(eLogicalSideBStart, std::max(aWidth,
|
|
mCell->GetBorderWidth(eLogicalSideBStart)));
|
|
}
|
|
if (mStartRow) {
|
|
BCPixelSize half = BC_BORDER_END_HALF(aWidth);
|
|
mStartRow->SetBStartBCBorderWidth(
|
|
std::max(nscoord(half), mStartRow->GetBStartBCBorderWidth()));
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
void
|
|
BCMapCellInfo::SetIStartBorderWidths(BCPixelSize aWidth)
|
|
{
|
|
if (mCell) {
|
|
mCell->SetBorderWidth(eLogicalSideIStart, std::max(aWidth,
|
|
mCell->GetBorderWidth(eLogicalSideIStart)));
|
|
}
|
|
if (mStartCol) {
|
|
BCPixelSize half = BC_BORDER_END_HALF(aWidth);
|
|
mStartCol->SetIStartBorderWidth(
|
|
std::max(nscoord(half), mStartCol->GetIStartBorderWidth()));
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
void
|
|
BCMapCellInfo::SetTableBEndBorderWidth(BCPixelSize aWidth)
|
|
{
|
|
mTableBCData->mBEndBorderWidth = std::max(mTableBCData->mBEndBorderWidth,
|
|
aWidth);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
void
|
|
BCMapCellInfo::SetColumn(int32_t aColX)
|
|
{
|
|
mCurrentColFrame = mTableFrame->GetColFrame(aColX);
|
|
if (!mCurrentColFrame) {
|
|
NS_ERROR("null mCurrentColFrame");
|
|
}
|
|
mCurrentColGroupFrame = static_cast<nsTableColGroupFrame*>
|
|
(mCurrentColFrame->GetParent());
|
|
if (!mCurrentColGroupFrame) {
|
|
NS_ERROR("null mCurrentColGroupFrame");
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
void
|
|
BCMapCellInfo::IncrementRow(bool aResetToBStartRowOfCell)
|
|
{
|
|
mCurrentRowFrame =
|
|
aResetToBStartRowOfCell ? mStartRow : mCurrentRowFrame->GetNextRow();
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
BCCellBorder
|
|
BCMapCellInfo::GetBStartEdgeBorder()
|
|
{
|
|
return CompareBorders(mTableFrame, mCurrentColGroupFrame, mCurrentColFrame,
|
|
mRowGroup, mStartRow, mCell, mTableWM,
|
|
eLogicalSideBStart, !ADJACENT);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
BCCellBorder
|
|
BCMapCellInfo::GetBEndEdgeBorder()
|
|
{
|
|
return CompareBorders(mTableFrame, mCurrentColGroupFrame, mCurrentColFrame,
|
|
mRowGroup, mEndRow, mCell, mTableWM,
|
|
eLogicalSideBEnd, ADJACENT);
|
|
}
|
|
BCCellBorder
|
|
BCMapCellInfo::GetIStartEdgeBorder()
|
|
{
|
|
return CompareBorders(mTableFrame, mColGroup, mStartCol, mRowGroup,
|
|
mCurrentRowFrame, mCell, mTableWM, eLogicalSideIStart,
|
|
!ADJACENT);
|
|
}
|
|
BCCellBorder
|
|
BCMapCellInfo::GetIEndEdgeBorder()
|
|
{
|
|
return CompareBorders(mTableFrame, mColGroup, mEndCol, mRowGroup,
|
|
mCurrentRowFrame, mCell, mTableWM, eLogicalSideIEnd,
|
|
ADJACENT);
|
|
}
|
|
BCCellBorder
|
|
BCMapCellInfo::GetIEndInternalBorder()
|
|
{
|
|
const nsIFrame* cg = mCgAtEnd ? mColGroup : nullptr;
|
|
return CompareBorders(nullptr, cg, mEndCol, nullptr, nullptr, mCell,
|
|
mTableWM, eLogicalSideIEnd, ADJACENT);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
BCCellBorder
|
|
BCMapCellInfo::GetIStartInternalBorder()
|
|
{
|
|
const nsIFrame* cg = mCgAtStart ? mColGroup : nullptr;
|
|
return CompareBorders(nullptr, cg, mStartCol, nullptr, nullptr, mCell,
|
|
mTableWM, eLogicalSideIStart, !ADJACENT);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
BCCellBorder
|
|
BCMapCellInfo::GetBEndInternalBorder()
|
|
{
|
|
const nsIFrame* rg = mRgAtEnd ? mRowGroup : nullptr;
|
|
return CompareBorders(nullptr, nullptr, nullptr, rg, mEndRow, mCell,
|
|
mTableWM, eLogicalSideBEnd, ADJACENT);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
BCCellBorder
|
|
BCMapCellInfo::GetBStartInternalBorder()
|
|
{
|
|
const nsIFrame* rg = mRgAtStart ? mRowGroup : nullptr;
|
|
return CompareBorders(nullptr, nullptr, nullptr, rg, mStartRow, mCell,
|
|
mTableWM, eLogicalSideBStart, !ADJACENT);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/* XXX This comment is still written in physical (horizontal-tb) terms.
|
|
|
|
Here is the order for storing border edges in the cell map as a cell is processed. There are
|
|
n=colspan top and bottom border edges per cell and n=rowspan left and right border edges per cell.
|
|
|
|
1) On the top edge of the table, store the top edge. Never store the top edge otherwise, since
|
|
a bottom edge from a cell above will take care of it.
|
|
2) On the left edge of the table, store the left edge. Never store the left edge othewise, since
|
|
a right edge from a cell to the left will take care of it.
|
|
3) Store the right edge (or edges if a row span)
|
|
4) Store the bottom edge (or edges if a col span)
|
|
|
|
Since corners are computed with only an array of BCCornerInfo indexed by the number-of-cols, corner
|
|
calculations are somewhat complicated. Using an array with number-of-rows * number-of-col entries
|
|
would simplify this, but at an extra in memory cost of nearly 12 bytes per cell map entry. Collapsing
|
|
borders already have about an extra 8 byte per cell map entry overhead (this could be
|
|
reduced to 4 bytes if we are willing to not store border widths in nsTableCellFrame), Here are the
|
|
rules in priority order for storing cornes in the cell map as a cell is processed. top-left means the
|
|
left endpoint of the border edge on the top of the cell. There are n=colspan top and bottom border
|
|
edges per cell and n=rowspan left and right border edges per cell.
|
|
|
|
1) On the top edge of the table, store the top-left corner, unless on the left edge of the table.
|
|
Never store the top-right corner, since it will get stored as a right-top corner.
|
|
2) On the left edge of the table, store the left-top corner. Never store the left-bottom corner,
|
|
since it will get stored as a bottom-left corner.
|
|
3) Store the right-top corner if (a) it is the top right corner of the table or (b) it is not on
|
|
the top edge of the table. Never store the right-bottom corner since it will get stored as a
|
|
bottom-right corner.
|
|
4) Store the bottom-right corner, if it is the bottom right corner of the table. Never store it
|
|
otherwise, since it will get stored as either a right-top corner by a cell below or
|
|
a bottom-left corner from a cell to the right.
|
|
5) Store the bottom-left corner, if (a) on the bottom edge of the table or (b) if the left edge hits
|
|
the top side of a colspan in its interior. Never store the corner otherwise, since it will
|
|
get stored as a right-top corner by a cell from below.
|
|
|
|
XXX the BC-RTL hack - The correct fix would be a rewrite as described in bug 203686.
|
|
In order to draw borders in rtl conditions somehow correct, the existing structure which relies
|
|
heavily on the assumption that the next cell sibling will be on the right side, has been modified.
|
|
We flip the border during painting and during style lookup. Look for tableIsLTR for places where
|
|
the flipping is done.
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
// Calc the dominant border at every cell edge and corner within the current damage area
|
|
void
|
|
nsTableFrame::CalcBCBorders()
|
|
{
|
|
NS_ASSERTION(IsBorderCollapse(),
|
|
"calling CalcBCBorders on separated-border table");
|
|
nsTableCellMap* tableCellMap = GetCellMap(); if (!tableCellMap) ABORT0();
|
|
int32_t numRows = GetRowCount();
|
|
int32_t numCols = GetColCount();
|
|
if (!numRows || !numCols)
|
|
return; // nothing to do
|
|
|
|
// Get the property holding the table damage area and border widths
|
|
BCPropertyData* propData = GetBCProperty();
|
|
if (!propData) ABORT0();
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
// calculate an expanded damage area
|
|
TableArea damageArea(propData->mDamageArea);
|
|
ExpandBCDamageArea(damageArea);
|
|
|
|
// segments that are on the table border edges need
|
|
// to be initialized only once
|
|
bool tableBorderReset[4];
|
|
for (uint32_t sideX = 0; sideX < ArrayLength(tableBorderReset); sideX++) {
|
|
tableBorderReset[sideX] = false;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
// block-dir borders indexed in inline-direction (cols)
|
|
BCCellBorders lastBlockDirBorders(damageArea.ColCount() + 1,
|
|
damageArea.StartCol());
|
|
if (!lastBlockDirBorders.borders) ABORT0();
|
|
BCCellBorder lastBStartBorder, lastBEndBorder;
|
|
// inline-dir borders indexed in inline-direction (cols)
|
|
BCCellBorders lastBEndBorders(damageArea.ColCount() + 1,
|
|
damageArea.StartCol());
|
|
if (!lastBEndBorders.borders) ABORT0();
|
|
bool startSeg;
|
|
bool gotRowBorder = false;
|
|
|
|
BCMapCellInfo info(this), ajaInfo(this);
|
|
|
|
BCCellBorder currentBorder, adjacentBorder;
|
|
BCCorners bStartCorners(damageArea.ColCount() + 1, damageArea.StartCol());
|
|
if (!bStartCorners.corners) ABORT0();
|
|
BCCorners bEndCorners(damageArea.ColCount() + 1, damageArea.StartCol());
|
|
if (!bEndCorners.corners) ABORT0();
|
|
|
|
BCMapCellIterator iter(this, damageArea);
|
|
for (iter.First(info); !iter.mAtEnd; iter.Next(info)) {
|
|
// see if lastBStartBorder, lastBEndBorder need to be reset
|
|
if (iter.IsNewRow()) {
|
|
gotRowBorder = false;
|
|
lastBStartBorder.Reset(info.mRowIndex, info.mRowSpan);
|
|
lastBEndBorder.Reset(info.GetCellEndRowIndex() + 1, info.mRowSpan);
|
|
}
|
|
else if (info.mColIndex > damageArea.StartCol()) {
|
|
lastBEndBorder = lastBEndBorders[info.mColIndex - 1];
|
|
if (info.mRowIndex >
|
|
(lastBEndBorder.rowIndex - lastBEndBorder.rowSpan)) {
|
|
// the bStart border's iStart edge butts against the middle of a rowspan
|
|
lastBStartBorder.Reset(info.mRowIndex, info.mRowSpan);
|
|
}
|
|
if (lastBEndBorder.rowIndex > (info.GetCellEndRowIndex() + 1)) {
|
|
// the bEnd border's iStart edge butts against the middle of a rowspan
|
|
lastBEndBorder.Reset(info.GetCellEndRowIndex() + 1, info.mRowSpan);
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
// find the dominant border considering the cell's bStart border and the table,
|
|
// row group, row if the border is at the bStart of the table, otherwise it was
|
|
// processed in a previous row
|
|
if (0 == info.mRowIndex) {
|
|
if (!tableBorderReset[eLogicalSideBStart]) {
|
|
propData->mBStartBorderWidth = 0;
|
|
tableBorderReset[eLogicalSideBStart] = true;
|
|
}
|
|
for (int32_t colIdx = info.mColIndex;
|
|
colIdx <= info.GetCellEndColIndex(); colIdx++) {
|
|
info.SetColumn(colIdx);
|
|
currentBorder = info.GetBStartEdgeBorder();
|
|
// update/store the bStart-iStart & bStart-iEnd corners of the seg
|
|
BCCornerInfo& tlCorner = bStartCorners[colIdx]; // bStart-iStart
|
|
if (0 == colIdx) {
|
|
// we are on the iEnd side of the corner
|
|
tlCorner.Set(eLogicalSideIEnd, currentBorder);
|
|
}
|
|
else {
|
|
tlCorner.Update(eLogicalSideIEnd, currentBorder);
|
|
tableCellMap->SetBCBorderCorner(eBStartIStart, *iter.mCellMap, 0, 0, colIdx,
|
|
LogicalSide(tlCorner.ownerSide),
|
|
tlCorner.subWidth,
|
|
tlCorner.bevel);
|
|
}
|
|
bStartCorners[colIdx + 1].Set(eLogicalSideIStart, currentBorder); // bStart-iEnd
|
|
// update lastBStartBorder and see if a new segment starts
|
|
startSeg = SetInlineDirBorder(currentBorder, tlCorner, lastBStartBorder);
|
|
// store the border segment in the cell map
|
|
tableCellMap->SetBCBorderEdge(eLogicalSideBStart, *iter.mCellMap, 0, 0, colIdx,
|
|
1, currentBorder.owner,
|
|
currentBorder.width, startSeg);
|
|
|
|
info.SetTableBStartBorderWidth(currentBorder.width);
|
|
info.SetBStartBorderWidths(currentBorder.width);
|
|
info.SetColumnBStartIEndContBCBorder();
|
|
}
|
|
info.SetTableBStartIStartContBCBorder();
|
|
}
|
|
else {
|
|
// see if the bStart border needs to be the start of a segment due to a
|
|
// block-dir border owning the corner
|
|
if (info.mColIndex > 0) {
|
|
BCData& data = info.mCellData->mData;
|
|
if (!data.IsBStartStart()) {
|
|
LogicalSide cornerSide;
|
|
bool bevel;
|
|
data.GetCorner(cornerSide, bevel);
|
|
if (IsBlock(cornerSide)) {
|
|
data.SetBStartStart(true);
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
// find the dominant border considering the cell's iStart border and the
|
|
// table, col group, col if the border is at the iStart of the table,
|
|
// otherwise it was processed in a previous col
|
|
if (0 == info.mColIndex) {
|
|
if (!tableBorderReset[eLogicalSideIStart]) {
|
|
propData->mIStartBorderWidth = 0;
|
|
tableBorderReset[eLogicalSideIStart] = true;
|
|
}
|
|
info.mCurrentRowFrame = nullptr;
|
|
for (int32_t rowB = info.mRowIndex; rowB <= info.GetCellEndRowIndex();
|
|
rowB++) {
|
|
info.IncrementRow(rowB == info.mRowIndex);
|
|
currentBorder = info.GetIStartEdgeBorder();
|
|
BCCornerInfo& tlCorner = (0 == rowB) ? bStartCorners[0] : bEndCorners[0];
|
|
tlCorner.Update(eLogicalSideBEnd, currentBorder);
|
|
tableCellMap->SetBCBorderCorner(eBStartIStart, *iter.mCellMap,
|
|
iter.mRowGroupStart, rowB, 0,
|
|
LogicalSide(tlCorner.ownerSide),
|
|
tlCorner.subWidth,
|
|
tlCorner.bevel);
|
|
bEndCorners[0].Set(eLogicalSideBStart, currentBorder); // bEnd-iStart
|
|
|
|
// update lastBlockDirBorders and see if a new segment starts
|
|
startSeg = SetBorder(currentBorder, lastBlockDirBorders[0]);
|
|
// store the border segment in the cell map
|
|
tableCellMap->SetBCBorderEdge(eLogicalSideIStart, *iter.mCellMap,
|
|
iter.mRowGroupStart, rowB, info.mColIndex,
|
|
1, currentBorder.owner,
|
|
currentBorder.width, startSeg);
|
|
info.SetTableIStartBorderWidth(rowB , currentBorder.width);
|
|
info.SetIStartBorderWidths(currentBorder.width);
|
|
info.SetRowIStartContBCBorder();
|
|
}
|
|
info.SetRowGroupIStartContBCBorder();
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
// find the dominant border considering the cell's iEnd border, adjacent
|
|
// cells and the table, row group, row
|
|
if (info.mNumTableCols == info.GetCellEndColIndex() + 1) {
|
|
// touches iEnd edge of table
|
|
if (!tableBorderReset[eLogicalSideIEnd]) {
|
|
propData->mIEndBorderWidth = 0;
|
|
tableBorderReset[eLogicalSideIEnd] = true;
|
|
}
|
|
info.mCurrentRowFrame = nullptr;
|
|
for (int32_t rowB = info.mRowIndex; rowB <= info.GetCellEndRowIndex();
|
|
rowB++) {
|
|
info.IncrementRow(rowB == info.mRowIndex);
|
|
currentBorder = info.GetIEndEdgeBorder();
|
|
// update/store the bStart-iEnd & bEnd-iEnd corners
|
|
BCCornerInfo& trCorner = (0 == rowB) ?
|
|
bStartCorners[info.GetCellEndColIndex() + 1] :
|
|
bEndCorners[info.GetCellEndColIndex() + 1];
|
|
trCorner.Update(eLogicalSideBEnd, currentBorder); // bStart-iEnd
|
|
tableCellMap->SetBCBorderCorner(eBStartIEnd, *iter.mCellMap,
|
|
iter.mRowGroupStart, rowB,
|
|
info.GetCellEndColIndex(),
|
|
LogicalSide(trCorner.ownerSide),
|
|
trCorner.subWidth,
|
|
trCorner.bevel);
|
|
BCCornerInfo& brCorner = bEndCorners[info.GetCellEndColIndex() + 1];
|
|
brCorner.Set(eLogicalSideBStart, currentBorder); // bEnd-iEnd
|
|
tableCellMap->SetBCBorderCorner(eBEndIEnd, *iter.mCellMap,
|
|
iter.mRowGroupStart, rowB,
|
|
info.GetCellEndColIndex(),
|
|
LogicalSide(brCorner.ownerSide),
|
|
brCorner.subWidth,
|
|
brCorner.bevel);
|
|
// update lastBlockDirBorders and see if a new segment starts
|
|
startSeg = SetBorder(currentBorder,
|
|
lastBlockDirBorders[info.GetCellEndColIndex() + 1]);
|
|
// store the border segment in the cell map and update cellBorders
|
|
tableCellMap->SetBCBorderEdge(eLogicalSideIEnd, *iter.mCellMap,
|
|
iter.mRowGroupStart, rowB,
|
|
info.GetCellEndColIndex(), 1,
|
|
currentBorder.owner, currentBorder.width,
|
|
startSeg);
|
|
info.SetTableIEndBorderWidth(rowB, currentBorder.width);
|
|
info.SetIEndBorderWidths(currentBorder.width);
|
|
info.SetRowIEndContBCBorder();
|
|
}
|
|
info.SetRowGroupIEndContBCBorder();
|
|
}
|
|
else {
|
|
int32_t segLength = 0;
|
|
BCMapCellInfo priorAjaInfo(this);
|
|
for (int32_t rowB = info.mRowIndex; rowB <= info.GetCellEndRowIndex();
|
|
rowB += segLength) {
|
|
iter.PeekIEnd(info, rowB, ajaInfo);
|
|
currentBorder = info.GetIEndInternalBorder();
|
|
adjacentBorder = ajaInfo.GetIStartInternalBorder();
|
|
currentBorder = CompareBorders(!CELL_CORNER, currentBorder,
|
|
adjacentBorder, !INLINE_DIR);
|
|
|
|
segLength = std::max(1, ajaInfo.mRowIndex + ajaInfo.mRowSpan - rowB);
|
|
segLength = std::min(segLength, info.mRowIndex + info.mRowSpan - rowB);
|
|
|
|
// update lastBlockDirBorders and see if a new segment starts
|
|
startSeg = SetBorder(currentBorder,
|
|
lastBlockDirBorders[info.GetCellEndColIndex() + 1]);
|
|
// store the border segment in the cell map and update cellBorders
|
|
if (info.GetCellEndColIndex() < damageArea.EndCol() &&
|
|
rowB >= damageArea.StartRow() && rowB < damageArea.EndRow()) {
|
|
tableCellMap->SetBCBorderEdge(eLogicalSideIEnd, *iter.mCellMap,
|
|
iter.mRowGroupStart, rowB,
|
|
info.GetCellEndColIndex(), segLength,
|
|
currentBorder.owner,
|
|
currentBorder.width, startSeg);
|
|
info.SetIEndBorderWidths(currentBorder.width);
|
|
ajaInfo.SetIStartBorderWidths(currentBorder.width);
|
|
}
|
|
// update the bStart-iEnd corner
|
|
bool hitsSpanOnIEnd = (rowB > ajaInfo.mRowIndex) &&
|
|
(rowB < ajaInfo.mRowIndex + ajaInfo.mRowSpan);
|
|
BCCornerInfo* trCorner = ((0 == rowB) || hitsSpanOnIEnd) ?
|
|
&bStartCorners[info.GetCellEndColIndex() + 1] :
|
|
&bEndCorners[info.GetCellEndColIndex() + 1];
|
|
trCorner->Update(eLogicalSideBEnd, currentBorder);
|
|
// if this is not the first time through,
|
|
// consider the segment to the iEnd side
|
|
if (rowB != info.mRowIndex) {
|
|
currentBorder = priorAjaInfo.GetBEndInternalBorder();
|
|
adjacentBorder = ajaInfo.GetBStartInternalBorder();
|
|
currentBorder = CompareBorders(!CELL_CORNER, currentBorder,
|
|
adjacentBorder, INLINE_DIR);
|
|
trCorner->Update(eLogicalSideIEnd, currentBorder);
|
|
}
|
|
// store the bStart-iEnd corner in the cell map
|
|
if (info.GetCellEndColIndex() < damageArea.EndCol() &&
|
|
rowB >= damageArea.StartRow()) {
|
|
if (0 != rowB) {
|
|
tableCellMap->SetBCBorderCorner(eBStartIEnd, *iter.mCellMap,
|
|
iter.mRowGroupStart, rowB,
|
|
info.GetCellEndColIndex(),
|
|
LogicalSide(trCorner->ownerSide),
|
|
trCorner->subWidth,
|
|
trCorner->bevel);
|
|
}
|
|
// store any corners this cell spans together with the aja cell
|
|
for (int32_t rX = rowB + 1; rX < rowB + segLength; rX++) {
|
|
tableCellMap->SetBCBorderCorner(eBEndIEnd, *iter.mCellMap,
|
|
iter.mRowGroupStart, rX,
|
|
info.GetCellEndColIndex(),
|
|
LogicalSide(trCorner->ownerSide),
|
|
trCorner->subWidth, false);
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
// update bEnd-iEnd corner, bStartCorners, bEndCorners
|
|
hitsSpanOnIEnd = (rowB + segLength <
|
|
ajaInfo.mRowIndex + ajaInfo.mRowSpan);
|
|
BCCornerInfo& brCorner = (hitsSpanOnIEnd) ?
|
|
bStartCorners[info.GetCellEndColIndex() + 1] :
|
|
bEndCorners[info.GetCellEndColIndex() + 1];
|
|
brCorner.Set(eLogicalSideBStart, currentBorder);
|
|
priorAjaInfo = ajaInfo;
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
for (int32_t colIdx = info.mColIndex + 1;
|
|
colIdx <= info.GetCellEndColIndex(); colIdx++) {
|
|
lastBlockDirBorders[colIdx].Reset(0,1);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
// find the dominant border considering the cell's bEnd border, adjacent
|
|
// cells and the table, row group, row
|
|
if (info.mNumTableRows == info.GetCellEndRowIndex() + 1) {
|
|
// touches bEnd edge of table
|
|
if (!tableBorderReset[eLogicalSideBEnd]) {
|
|
propData->mBEndBorderWidth = 0;
|
|
tableBorderReset[eLogicalSideBEnd] = true;
|
|
}
|
|
for (int32_t colIdx = info.mColIndex;
|
|
colIdx <= info.GetCellEndColIndex(); colIdx++) {
|
|
info.SetColumn(colIdx);
|
|
currentBorder = info.GetBEndEdgeBorder();
|
|
// update/store the bEnd-iStart & bEnd-IEnd corners
|
|
BCCornerInfo& blCorner = bEndCorners[colIdx]; // bEnd-iStart
|
|
blCorner.Update(eLogicalSideIEnd, currentBorder);
|
|
tableCellMap->SetBCBorderCorner(eBEndIStart, *iter.mCellMap,
|
|
iter.mRowGroupStart,
|
|
info.GetCellEndRowIndex(),
|
|
colIdx,
|
|
LogicalSide(blCorner.ownerSide),
|
|
blCorner.subWidth, blCorner.bevel);
|
|
BCCornerInfo& brCorner = bEndCorners[colIdx + 1]; // bEnd-iEnd
|
|
brCorner.Update(eLogicalSideIStart, currentBorder);
|
|
if (info.mNumTableCols == colIdx + 1) { // bEnd-IEnd corner of the table
|
|
tableCellMap->SetBCBorderCorner(eBEndIEnd, *iter.mCellMap,
|
|
iter.mRowGroupStart,
|
|
info.GetCellEndRowIndex(), colIdx,
|
|
LogicalSide(brCorner.ownerSide),
|
|
brCorner.subWidth,
|
|
brCorner.bevel, true);
|
|
}
|
|
// update lastBEndBorder and see if a new segment starts
|
|
startSeg = SetInlineDirBorder(currentBorder, blCorner, lastBEndBorder);
|
|
if (!startSeg) {
|
|
// make sure that we did not compare apples to oranges i.e. the
|
|
// current border should be a continuation of the lastBEndBorder,
|
|
// as it is a bEnd border
|
|
// add 1 to the info.GetCellEndRowIndex()
|
|
startSeg = (lastBEndBorder.rowIndex !=
|
|
(info.GetCellEndRowIndex() + 1));
|
|
}
|
|
// store the border segment in the cell map and update cellBorders
|
|
tableCellMap->SetBCBorderEdge(eLogicalSideBEnd, *iter.mCellMap,
|
|
iter.mRowGroupStart,
|
|
info.GetCellEndRowIndex(),
|
|
colIdx, 1, currentBorder.owner,
|
|
currentBorder.width, startSeg);
|
|
// update lastBEndBorders
|
|
lastBEndBorder.rowIndex = info.GetCellEndRowIndex() + 1;
|
|
lastBEndBorder.rowSpan = info.mRowSpan;
|
|
lastBEndBorders[colIdx] = lastBEndBorder;
|
|
|
|
info.SetBEndBorderWidths(currentBorder.width);
|
|
info.SetTableBEndBorderWidth(currentBorder.width);
|
|
info.SetColumnBEndContBCBorder();
|
|
}
|
|
info.SetRowGroupBEndContBCBorder();
|
|
info.SetColGroupBEndContBCBorder();
|
|
}
|
|
else {
|
|
int32_t segLength = 0;
|
|
for (int32_t colIdx = info.mColIndex;
|
|
colIdx <= info.GetCellEndColIndex(); colIdx += segLength) {
|
|
iter.PeekBEnd(info, colIdx, ajaInfo);
|
|
currentBorder = info.GetBEndInternalBorder();
|
|
adjacentBorder = ajaInfo.GetBStartInternalBorder();
|
|
currentBorder = CompareBorders(!CELL_CORNER, currentBorder,
|
|
adjacentBorder, INLINE_DIR);
|
|
segLength = std::max(1, ajaInfo.mColIndex + ajaInfo.mColSpan - colIdx);
|
|
segLength = std::min(segLength, info.mColIndex + info.mColSpan - colIdx);
|
|
|
|
// update, store the bEnd-iStart corner
|
|
BCCornerInfo& blCorner = bEndCorners[colIdx]; // bEnd-iStart
|
|
bool hitsSpanBelow = (colIdx > ajaInfo.mColIndex) &&
|
|
(colIdx < ajaInfo.mColIndex + ajaInfo.mColSpan);
|
|
bool update = true;
|
|
if (colIdx == info.mColIndex && colIdx > damageArea.StartCol()) {
|
|
int32_t prevRowIndex = lastBEndBorders[colIdx - 1].rowIndex;
|
|
if (prevRowIndex > info.GetCellEndRowIndex() + 1) {
|
|
// hits a rowspan on the iEnd side
|
|
update = false;
|
|
// the corner was taken care of during the cell on the iStart side
|
|
}
|
|
else if (prevRowIndex < info.GetCellEndRowIndex() + 1) {
|
|
// spans below the cell to the iStart side
|
|
bStartCorners[colIdx] = blCorner;
|
|
blCorner.Set(eLogicalSideIEnd, currentBorder);
|
|
update = false;
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
if (update) {
|
|
blCorner.Update(eLogicalSideIEnd, currentBorder);
|
|
}
|
|
if (info.GetCellEndRowIndex() < damageArea.EndRow() &&
|
|
colIdx >= damageArea.StartCol()) {
|
|
if (hitsSpanBelow) {
|
|
tableCellMap->SetBCBorderCorner(eBEndIStart, *iter.mCellMap,
|
|
iter.mRowGroupStart,
|
|
info.GetCellEndRowIndex(), colIdx,
|
|
LogicalSide(blCorner.ownerSide),
|
|
blCorner.subWidth, blCorner.bevel);
|
|
}
|
|
// store any corners this cell spans together with the aja cell
|
|
for (int32_t c = colIdx + 1; c < colIdx + segLength; c++) {
|
|
BCCornerInfo& corner = bEndCorners[c];
|
|
corner.Set(eLogicalSideIEnd, currentBorder);
|
|
tableCellMap->SetBCBorderCorner(eBEndIStart, *iter.mCellMap,
|
|
iter.mRowGroupStart,
|
|
info.GetCellEndRowIndex(), c,
|
|
LogicalSide(corner.ownerSide),
|
|
corner.subWidth,
|
|
false);
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
// update lastBEndBorders and see if a new segment starts
|
|
startSeg = SetInlineDirBorder(currentBorder, blCorner, lastBEndBorder);
|
|
if (!startSeg) {
|
|
// make sure that we did not compare apples to oranges i.e. the
|
|
// current border should be a continuation of the lastBEndBorder,
|
|
// as it is a bEnd border
|
|
// add 1 to the info.GetCellEndRowIndex()
|
|
startSeg = (lastBEndBorder.rowIndex !=
|
|
info.GetCellEndRowIndex() + 1);
|
|
}
|
|
lastBEndBorder.rowIndex = info.GetCellEndRowIndex() + 1;
|
|
lastBEndBorder.rowSpan = info.mRowSpan;
|
|
for (int32_t c = colIdx; c < colIdx + segLength; c++) {
|
|
lastBEndBorders[c] = lastBEndBorder;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
// store the border segment the cell map and update cellBorders
|
|
if (info.GetCellEndRowIndex() < damageArea.EndRow() &&
|
|
colIdx >= damageArea.StartCol() && colIdx < damageArea.EndCol()) {
|
|
tableCellMap->SetBCBorderEdge(eLogicalSideBEnd, *iter.mCellMap,
|
|
iter.mRowGroupStart,
|
|
info.GetCellEndRowIndex(),
|
|
colIdx, segLength, currentBorder.owner,
|
|
currentBorder.width, startSeg);
|
|
info.SetBEndBorderWidths(currentBorder.width);
|
|
ajaInfo.SetBStartBorderWidths(currentBorder.width);
|
|
}
|
|
// update bEnd-iEnd corner
|
|
BCCornerInfo& brCorner = bEndCorners[colIdx + segLength];
|
|
brCorner.Update(eLogicalSideIStart, currentBorder);
|
|
}
|
|
if (!gotRowBorder && 1 == info.mRowSpan &&
|
|
(ajaInfo.mStartRow || info.mRgAtEnd)) {
|
|
//get continuous row/row group border
|
|
//we need to check the row group's bEnd border if this is
|
|
//the last row in the row group, but only a cell with rowspan=1
|
|
//will know whether *this* row is at the bEnd
|
|
const nsIFrame* nextRowGroup =
|
|
ajaInfo.mRgAtStart ? ajaInfo.mRowGroup : nullptr;
|
|
info.SetInnerRowGroupBEndContBCBorder(nextRowGroup, ajaInfo.mStartRow);
|
|
gotRowBorder = true;
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
// see if the cell to the iEnd side had a rowspan and its bEnd-iStart border
|
|
// needs be joined with this one's bEnd
|
|
// if there is a cell to the iEnd and the cell to iEnd side was a rowspan
|
|
if ((info.mNumTableCols != info.GetCellEndColIndex() + 1) &&
|
|
(lastBEndBorders[info.GetCellEndColIndex() + 1].rowSpan > 1)) {
|
|
BCCornerInfo& corner = bEndCorners[info.GetCellEndColIndex() + 1];
|
|
if (!IsBlock(LogicalSide(corner.ownerSide))) {
|
|
// not a block-dir owner
|
|
BCCellBorder& thisBorder = lastBEndBorder;
|
|
BCCellBorder& nextBorder = lastBEndBorders[info.mColIndex + 1];
|
|
if ((thisBorder.color == nextBorder.color) &&
|
|
(thisBorder.width == nextBorder.width) &&
|
|
(thisBorder.style == nextBorder.style)) {
|
|
// set the flag on the next border indicating it is not the start of a
|
|
// new segment
|
|
if (iter.mCellMap) {
|
|
tableCellMap->ResetBStartStart(eLogicalSideBEnd, *iter.mCellMap,
|
|
info.GetCellEndRowIndex(),
|
|
info.GetCellEndColIndex() + 1);
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
} // for (iter.First(info); info.mCell; iter.Next(info)) {
|
|
// reset the bc flag and damage area
|
|
SetNeedToCalcBCBorders(false);
|
|
propData->mDamageArea = TableArea(0, 0, 0, 0);
|
|
#ifdef DEBUG_TABLE_CELLMAP
|
|
mCellMap->Dump();
|
|
#endif
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
class BCPaintBorderIterator;
|
|
|
|
struct BCBlockDirSeg
|
|
{
|
|
BCBlockDirSeg();
|
|
|
|
void Start(BCPaintBorderIterator& aIter,
|
|
BCBorderOwner aBorderOwner,
|
|
BCPixelSize aBlockSegISize,
|
|
BCPixelSize aInlineSegBSize);
|
|
|
|
void Initialize(BCPaintBorderIterator& aIter);
|
|
void GetBEndCorner(BCPaintBorderIterator& aIter,
|
|
BCPixelSize aInlineSegBSize);
|
|
|
|
|
|
void Paint(BCPaintBorderIterator& aIter,
|
|
nsRenderingContext& aRenderingContext,
|
|
BCPixelSize aInlineSegBSize);
|
|
void AdvanceOffsetB();
|
|
void IncludeCurrentBorder(BCPaintBorderIterator& aIter);
|
|
|
|
|
|
union {
|
|
nsTableColFrame* mCol;
|
|
int32_t mColWidth;
|
|
};
|
|
nscoord mOffsetI; // i-offset with respect to the table edge
|
|
nscoord mOffsetB; // b-offset with respect to the table edge
|
|
nscoord mLength; // block-dir length including corners
|
|
BCPixelSize mWidth; // thickness in pixels
|
|
|
|
nsTableCellFrame* mAjaCell; // previous sibling to the first cell
|
|
// where the segment starts, it can be
|
|
// the owner of a segment
|
|
nsTableCellFrame* mFirstCell; // cell at the start of the segment
|
|
nsTableRowGroupFrame* mFirstRowGroup; // row group at the start of the segment
|
|
nsTableRowFrame* mFirstRow; // row at the start of the segment
|
|
nsTableCellFrame* mLastCell; // cell at the current end of the
|
|
// segment
|
|
|
|
|
|
uint8_t mOwner; // owner of the border, defines the
|
|
// style
|
|
LogicalSide mBStartBevelSide; // direction to bevel at the bStart
|
|
nscoord mBStartBevelOffset; // how much to bevel at the bStart
|
|
BCPixelSize mBEndInlineSegBSize; // bSize of the crossing
|
|
// inline-dir border
|
|
nscoord mBEndOffset; // how much longer is the segment due
|
|
// to the inline-dir border, by this
|
|
// amount the next segment needs to be
|
|
// shifted.
|
|
bool mIsBEndBevel; // should we bevel at the bEnd
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
struct BCInlineDirSeg
|
|
{
|
|
BCInlineDirSeg();
|
|
|
|
void Start(BCPaintBorderIterator& aIter,
|
|
BCBorderOwner aBorderOwner,
|
|
BCPixelSize aBEndBlockSegISize,
|
|
BCPixelSize aInlineSegBSize);
|
|
void GetIEndCorner(BCPaintBorderIterator& aIter,
|
|
BCPixelSize aIStartSegISize);
|
|
void AdvanceOffsetI();
|
|
void IncludeCurrentBorder(BCPaintBorderIterator& aIter);
|
|
void Paint(BCPaintBorderIterator& aIter,
|
|
nsRenderingContext& aRenderingContext);
|
|
|
|
nscoord mOffsetI; // i-offset with respect to the table edge
|
|
nscoord mOffsetB; // b-offset with respect to the table edge
|
|
nscoord mLength; // inline-dir length including corners
|
|
BCPixelSize mWidth; // border thickness in pixels
|
|
nscoord mIStartBevelOffset; // how much to bevel at the iStart
|
|
LogicalSide mIStartBevelSide; // direction to bevel at the iStart
|
|
bool mIsIEndBevel; // should we bevel at the iEnd end
|
|
nscoord mIEndBevelOffset; // how much to bevel at the iEnd
|
|
LogicalSide mIEndBevelSide; // direction to bevel at the iEnd
|
|
nscoord mEndOffset; // how much longer is the segment due
|
|
// to the block-dir border, by this
|
|
// amount the next segment needs to be
|
|
// shifted.
|
|
uint8_t mOwner; // owner of the border, defines the
|
|
// style
|
|
nsTableCellFrame* mFirstCell; // cell at the start of the segment
|
|
nsTableCellFrame* mAjaCell; // neighboring cell to the first cell
|
|
// where the segment starts, it can be
|
|
// the owner of a segment
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
// Iterates over borders (iStart border, corner, bStart border) in the cell map within a damage area
|
|
// from iStart to iEnd, bStart to bEnd. All members are in terms of the 1st in flow frames, except
|
|
// where suffixed by InFlow.
|
|
class BCPaintBorderIterator
|
|
{
|
|
public:
|
|
explicit BCPaintBorderIterator(nsTableFrame* aTable);
|
|
~BCPaintBorderIterator() { if (mBlockDirInfo) {
|
|
delete [] mBlockDirInfo;
|
|
}}
|
|
void Reset();
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* Determine the damage area in terms of rows and columns and finalize
|
|
* mInitialOffsetI and mInitialOffsetB.
|
|
* @param aDirtyRect - dirty rect in table coordinates
|
|
* @return - true if we need to paint something given dirty rect
|
|
*/
|
|
bool SetDamageArea(const nsRect& aDamageRect);
|
|
void First();
|
|
void Next();
|
|
void AccumulateOrPaintInlineDirSegment(nsRenderingContext& aRenderingContext);
|
|
void AccumulateOrPaintBlockDirSegment(nsRenderingContext& aRenderingContext);
|
|
void ResetVerInfo();
|
|
void StoreColumnWidth(int32_t aIndex);
|
|
bool BlockDirSegmentOwnsCorner();
|
|
|
|
nsTableFrame* mTable;
|
|
nsTableFrame* mTableFirstInFlow;
|
|
nsTableCellMap* mTableCellMap;
|
|
nsCellMap* mCellMap;
|
|
WritingMode mTableWM;
|
|
const nsStyleBackground* mTableBgColor;
|
|
nsTableFrame::RowGroupArray mRowGroups;
|
|
|
|
nsTableRowGroupFrame* mPrevRg;
|
|
nsTableRowGroupFrame* mRg;
|
|
bool mIsRepeatedHeader;
|
|
bool mIsRepeatedFooter;
|
|
nsTableRowGroupFrame* mStartRg; // first row group in the damagearea
|
|
int32_t mRgIndex; // current row group index in the
|
|
// mRowgroups array
|
|
int32_t mFifRgFirstRowIndex; // start row index of the first in
|
|
// flow of the row group
|
|
int32_t mRgFirstRowIndex; // row index of the first row in the
|
|
// row group
|
|
int32_t mRgLastRowIndex; // row index of the last row in the row
|
|
// group
|
|
int32_t mNumTableRows; // number of rows in the table and all
|
|
// continuations
|
|
int32_t mNumTableCols; // number of columns in the table
|
|
int32_t mColIndex; // with respect to the table
|
|
int32_t mRowIndex; // with respect to the table
|
|
int32_t mRepeatedHeaderRowIndex; // row index in a repeated
|
|
//header, it's equivalent to
|
|
// mRowIndex when we're in a repeated
|
|
// header, and set to the last row
|
|
// index of a repeated header when
|
|
// we're not
|
|
bool mIsNewRow;
|
|
bool mAtEnd; // the iterator cycled over all
|
|
// borders
|
|
nsTableRowFrame* mPrevRow;
|
|
nsTableRowFrame* mRow;
|
|
nsTableRowFrame* mStartRow; //first row in a inside the damagearea
|
|
|
|
|
|
// cell properties
|
|
nsTableCellFrame* mPrevCell;
|
|
nsTableCellFrame* mCell;
|
|
BCCellData* mPrevCellData;
|
|
BCCellData* mCellData;
|
|
BCData* mBCData;
|
|
|
|
bool IsTableBStartMost() {return (mRowIndex == 0) && !mTable->GetPrevInFlow();}
|
|
bool IsTableIEndMost() {return (mColIndex >= mNumTableCols);}
|
|
bool IsTableBEndMost() {return (mRowIndex >= mNumTableRows) && !mTable->GetNextInFlow();}
|
|
bool IsTableIStartMost() {return (mColIndex == 0);}
|
|
bool IsDamageAreaBStartMost() const
|
|
{ return mRowIndex == mDamageArea.StartRow(); }
|
|
bool IsDamageAreaIEndMost() const
|
|
{ return mColIndex >= mDamageArea.EndCol(); }
|
|
bool IsDamageAreaBEndMost() const
|
|
{ return mRowIndex >= mDamageArea.EndRow(); }
|
|
bool IsDamageAreaIStartMost() const
|
|
{ return mColIndex == mDamageArea.StartCol(); }
|
|
int32_t GetRelativeColIndex() const
|
|
{ return mColIndex - mDamageArea.StartCol(); }
|
|
|
|
TableArea mDamageArea; // damageArea in cellmap coordinates
|
|
bool IsAfterRepeatedHeader()
|
|
{ return !mIsRepeatedHeader && (mRowIndex == (mRepeatedHeaderRowIndex + 1)); }
|
|
bool StartRepeatedFooter() const
|
|
{
|
|
return mIsRepeatedFooter && mRowIndex == mRgFirstRowIndex &&
|
|
mRowIndex != mDamageArea.StartRow();
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
nscoord mInitialOffsetI; // offsetI of the first border with
|
|
// respect to the table
|
|
nscoord mInitialOffsetB; // offsetB of the first border with
|
|
// respect to the table
|
|
nscoord mNextOffsetB; // offsetB of the next segment
|
|
BCBlockDirSeg* mBlockDirInfo; // this array is used differently when
|
|
// inline-dir and block-dir borders are drawn
|
|
// When inline-dir border are drawn we cache
|
|
// the column widths and the width of the
|
|
// block-dir borders that arrive from bStart
|
|
// When we draw block-dir borders we store
|
|
// lengths and width for block-dir borders
|
|
// before they are drawn while we move over
|
|
// the columns in the damage area
|
|
// It has one more elements than columns are
|
|
// in the table.
|
|
BCInlineDirSeg mInlineSeg; // the inline-dir segment while we
|
|
// move over the colums
|
|
BCPixelSize mPrevInlineSegBSize; // the bSize of the previous
|
|
// inline-dir border
|
|
|
|
private:
|
|
|
|
bool SetNewRow(nsTableRowFrame* aRow = nullptr);
|
|
bool SetNewRowGroup();
|
|
void SetNewData(int32_t aRowIndex, int32_t aColIndex);
|
|
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
BCPaintBorderIterator::BCPaintBorderIterator(nsTableFrame* aTable)
|
|
: mTable(aTable)
|
|
, mTableFirstInFlow(static_cast<nsTableFrame*>(aTable->FirstInFlow()))
|
|
, mTableCellMap(aTable->GetCellMap())
|
|
, mTableWM(aTable->StyleContext())
|
|
{
|
|
mBlockDirInfo = nullptr;
|
|
LogicalMargin childAreaOffset = mTable->GetChildAreaOffset(mTableWM, nullptr);
|
|
// y position of first row in damage area
|
|
mInitialOffsetB =
|
|
mTable->GetPrevInFlow() ? 0 : childAreaOffset.BStart(mTableWM);
|
|
mNumTableRows = mTable->GetRowCount();
|
|
mNumTableCols = mTable->GetColCount();
|
|
|
|
// Get the ordered row groups
|
|
mTable->OrderRowGroups(mRowGroups);
|
|
// initialize to a non existing index
|
|
mRepeatedHeaderRowIndex = -99;
|
|
|
|
nsIFrame* bgFrame =
|
|
nsCSSRendering::FindNonTransparentBackgroundFrame(aTable);
|
|
mTableBgColor = bgFrame->StyleBackground();
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
bool
|
|
BCPaintBorderIterator::SetDamageArea(const nsRect& aDirtyRect)
|
|
{
|
|
nsSize containerSize = mTable->GetSize();
|
|
LogicalRect dirtyRect(mTableWM, aDirtyRect, containerSize);
|
|
uint32_t startRowIndex, endRowIndex, startColIndex, endColIndex;
|
|
startRowIndex = endRowIndex = startColIndex = endColIndex = 0;
|
|
bool done = false;
|
|
bool haveIntersect = false;
|
|
// find startRowIndex, endRowIndex
|
|
nscoord rowB = mInitialOffsetB;
|
|
for (uint32_t rgIdx = 0; rgIdx < mRowGroups.Length() && !done; rgIdx++) {
|
|
nsTableRowGroupFrame* rgFrame = mRowGroups[rgIdx];
|
|
for (nsTableRowFrame* rowFrame = rgFrame->GetFirstRow(); rowFrame;
|
|
rowFrame = rowFrame->GetNextRow()) {
|
|
// get the row rect relative to the table rather than the row group
|
|
nscoord rowBSize = rowFrame->BSize(mTableWM);
|
|
if (haveIntersect) {
|
|
// conservatively estimate the half border widths outside the row
|
|
nscoord borderHalf = mTable->GetPrevInFlow() ? 0 : nsPresContext::
|
|
CSSPixelsToAppUnits(rowFrame->GetBStartBCBorderWidth() + 1);
|
|
if (dirtyRect.BEnd(mTableWM) >= rowB - borderHalf) {
|
|
nsTableRowFrame* fifRow =
|
|
static_cast<nsTableRowFrame*>(rowFrame->FirstInFlow());
|
|
endRowIndex = fifRow->GetRowIndex();
|
|
}
|
|
else done = true;
|
|
}
|
|
else {
|
|
// conservatively estimate the half border widths outside the row
|
|
nscoord borderHalf = mTable->GetNextInFlow() ? 0 : nsPresContext::
|
|
CSSPixelsToAppUnits(rowFrame->GetBEndBCBorderWidth() + 1);
|
|
if (rowB + rowBSize + borderHalf >= dirtyRect.BStart(mTableWM)) {
|
|
mStartRg = rgFrame;
|
|
mStartRow = rowFrame;
|
|
nsTableRowFrame* fifRow =
|
|
static_cast<nsTableRowFrame*>(rowFrame->FirstInFlow());
|
|
startRowIndex = endRowIndex = fifRow->GetRowIndex();
|
|
haveIntersect = true;
|
|
}
|
|
else {
|
|
mInitialOffsetB += rowBSize;
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
rowB += rowBSize;
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
mNextOffsetB = mInitialOffsetB;
|
|
|
|
// XXX comment refers to the obsolete NS_FRAME_OUTSIDE_CHILDREN flag
|
|
// XXX but I don't understand it, so not changing it for now
|
|
// outer table borders overflow the table, so the table might be
|
|
// target to other areas as the NS_FRAME_OUTSIDE_CHILDREN is set
|
|
// on the table
|
|
if (!haveIntersect)
|
|
return false;
|
|
// find startColIndex, endColIndex, startColX
|
|
haveIntersect = false;
|
|
if (0 == mNumTableCols)
|
|
return false;
|
|
|
|
LogicalMargin childAreaOffset = mTable->GetChildAreaOffset(mTableWM, nullptr);
|
|
|
|
// inline position of first col in damage area
|
|
mInitialOffsetI = childAreaOffset.IStart(mTableWM);
|
|
|
|
nscoord x = 0;
|
|
int32_t colIdx;
|
|
for (colIdx = 0; colIdx != mNumTableCols; colIdx++) {
|
|
nsTableColFrame* colFrame = mTableFirstInFlow->GetColFrame(colIdx);
|
|
if (!colFrame) ABORT1(false);
|
|
// get the col rect relative to the table rather than the col group
|
|
nscoord colISize = colFrame->ISize(mTableWM);
|
|
if (haveIntersect) {
|
|
// conservatively estimate the iStart half border width outside the col
|
|
nscoord iStartBorderHalf = nsPresContext::
|
|
CSSPixelsToAppUnits(colFrame->GetIStartBorderWidth() + 1);
|
|
if (dirtyRect.IEnd(mTableWM) >= x - iStartBorderHalf) {
|
|
endColIndex = colIdx;
|
|
}
|
|
else break;
|
|
}
|
|
else {
|
|
// conservatively estimate the iEnd half border width outside the col
|
|
nscoord iEndBorderHalf = nsPresContext::
|
|
CSSPixelsToAppUnits(colFrame->GetIEndBorderWidth() + 1);
|
|
if (x + colISize + iEndBorderHalf >= dirtyRect.IStart(mTableWM)) {
|
|
startColIndex = endColIndex = colIdx;
|
|
haveIntersect = true;
|
|
}
|
|
else {
|
|
mInitialOffsetI += colISize;
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
x += colISize;
|
|
}
|
|
if (!haveIntersect)
|
|
return false;
|
|
mDamageArea = TableArea(startColIndex, startRowIndex,
|
|
1 + DeprecatedAbs<int32_t>(endColIndex - startColIndex),
|
|
1 + endRowIndex - startRowIndex);
|
|
|
|
Reset();
|
|
mBlockDirInfo = new BCBlockDirSeg[mDamageArea.ColCount() + 1];
|
|
if (!mBlockDirInfo)
|
|
return false;
|
|
return true;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
void
|
|
BCPaintBorderIterator::Reset()
|
|
{
|
|
mAtEnd = true; // gets reset when First() is called
|
|
mRg = mStartRg;
|
|
mPrevRow = nullptr;
|
|
mRow = mStartRow;
|
|
mRowIndex = 0;
|
|
mColIndex = 0;
|
|
mRgIndex = -1;
|
|
mPrevCell = nullptr;
|
|
mCell = nullptr;
|
|
mPrevCellData = nullptr;
|
|
mCellData = nullptr;
|
|
mBCData = nullptr;
|
|
ResetVerInfo();
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* Set the iterator data to a new cellmap coordinate
|
|
* @param aRowIndex - the row index
|
|
* @param aColIndex - the col index
|
|
*/
|
|
void
|
|
BCPaintBorderIterator::SetNewData(int32_t aY,
|
|
int32_t aX)
|
|
{
|
|
if (!mTableCellMap || !mTableCellMap->mBCInfo) ABORT0();
|
|
|
|
mColIndex = aX;
|
|
mRowIndex = aY;
|
|
mPrevCellData = mCellData;
|
|
if (IsTableIEndMost() && IsTableBEndMost()) {
|
|
mCell = nullptr;
|
|
mBCData = &mTableCellMap->mBCInfo->mBEndIEndCorner;
|
|
}
|
|
else if (IsTableIEndMost()) {
|
|
mCellData = nullptr;
|
|
mBCData = &mTableCellMap->mBCInfo->mIEndBorders.ElementAt(aY);
|
|
}
|
|
else if (IsTableBEndMost()) {
|
|
mCellData = nullptr;
|
|
mBCData = &mTableCellMap->mBCInfo->mBEndBorders.ElementAt(aX);
|
|
}
|
|
else {
|
|
if (uint32_t(mRowIndex - mFifRgFirstRowIndex) < mCellMap->mRows.Length()) {
|
|
mBCData = nullptr;
|
|
mCellData =
|
|
(BCCellData*)mCellMap->mRows[mRowIndex - mFifRgFirstRowIndex].SafeElementAt(mColIndex);
|
|
if (mCellData) {
|
|
mBCData = &mCellData->mData;
|
|
if (!mCellData->IsOrig()) {
|
|
if (mCellData->IsRowSpan()) {
|
|
aY -= mCellData->GetRowSpanOffset();
|
|
}
|
|
if (mCellData->IsColSpan()) {
|
|
aX -= mCellData->GetColSpanOffset();
|
|
}
|
|
if ((aX >= 0) && (aY >= 0)) {
|
|
mCellData = (BCCellData*)mCellMap->mRows[aY - mFifRgFirstRowIndex][aX];
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
if (mCellData->IsOrig()) {
|
|
mPrevCell = mCell;
|
|
mCell = mCellData->GetCellFrame();
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* Set the iterator to a new row
|
|
* @param aRow - the new row frame, if null the iterator will advance to the
|
|
* next row
|
|
*/
|
|
bool
|
|
BCPaintBorderIterator::SetNewRow(nsTableRowFrame* aRow)
|
|
{
|
|
mPrevRow = mRow;
|
|
mRow = (aRow) ? aRow : mRow->GetNextRow();
|
|
if (mRow) {
|
|
mIsNewRow = true;
|
|
mRowIndex = mRow->GetRowIndex();
|
|
mColIndex = mDamageArea.StartCol();
|
|
mPrevInlineSegBSize = 0;
|
|
if (mIsRepeatedHeader) {
|
|
mRepeatedHeaderRowIndex = mRowIndex;
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
else {
|
|
mAtEnd = true;
|
|
}
|
|
return !mAtEnd;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* Advance the iterator to the next row group
|
|
*/
|
|
bool
|
|
BCPaintBorderIterator::SetNewRowGroup()
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
mRgIndex++;
|
|
|
|
mIsRepeatedHeader = false;
|
|
mIsRepeatedFooter = false;
|
|
|
|
NS_ASSERTION(mRgIndex >= 0, "mRgIndex out of bounds");
|
|
if (uint32_t(mRgIndex) < mRowGroups.Length()) {
|
|
mPrevRg = mRg;
|
|
mRg = mRowGroups[mRgIndex];
|
|
nsTableRowGroupFrame* fifRg =
|
|
static_cast<nsTableRowGroupFrame*>(mRg->FirstInFlow());
|
|
mFifRgFirstRowIndex = fifRg->GetStartRowIndex();
|
|
mRgFirstRowIndex = mRg->GetStartRowIndex();
|
|
mRgLastRowIndex = mRgFirstRowIndex + mRg->GetRowCount() - 1;
|
|
|
|
if (SetNewRow(mRg->GetFirstRow())) {
|
|
mCellMap = mTableCellMap->GetMapFor(fifRg, nullptr);
|
|
if (!mCellMap) ABORT1(false);
|
|
}
|
|
if (mRg && mTable->GetPrevInFlow() && !mRg->GetPrevInFlow()) {
|
|
// if mRowGroup doesn't have a prev in flow, then it may be a repeated
|
|
// header or footer
|
|
const nsStyleDisplay* display = mRg->StyleDisplay();
|
|
if (mRowIndex == mDamageArea.StartRow()) {
|
|
mIsRepeatedHeader = (NS_STYLE_DISPLAY_TABLE_HEADER_GROUP == display->mDisplay);
|
|
}
|
|
else {
|
|
mIsRepeatedFooter = (NS_STYLE_DISPLAY_TABLE_FOOTER_GROUP == display->mDisplay);
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
else {
|
|
mAtEnd = true;
|
|
}
|
|
return !mAtEnd;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* Move the iterator to the first position in the damageArea
|
|
*/
|
|
void
|
|
BCPaintBorderIterator::First()
|
|
{
|
|
if (!mTable || mDamageArea.StartCol() >= mNumTableCols ||
|
|
mDamageArea.StartRow() >= mNumTableRows) ABORT0();
|
|
|
|
mAtEnd = false;
|
|
|
|
uint32_t numRowGroups = mRowGroups.Length();
|
|
for (uint32_t rgY = 0; rgY < numRowGroups; rgY++) {
|
|
nsTableRowGroupFrame* rowG = mRowGroups[rgY];
|
|
int32_t start = rowG->GetStartRowIndex();
|
|
int32_t end = start + rowG->GetRowCount() - 1;
|
|
if (mDamageArea.StartRow() >= start && mDamageArea.StartRow() <= end) {
|
|
mRgIndex = rgY - 1; // SetNewRowGroup increments rowGroupIndex
|
|
if (SetNewRowGroup()) {
|
|
while (mRowIndex < mDamageArea.StartRow() && !mAtEnd) {
|
|
SetNewRow();
|
|
}
|
|
if (!mAtEnd) {
|
|
SetNewData(mDamageArea.StartRow(), mDamageArea.StartCol());
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
return;
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
mAtEnd = true;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* Advance the iterator to the next position
|
|
*/
|
|
void
|
|
BCPaintBorderIterator::Next()
|
|
{
|
|
if (mAtEnd) ABORT0();
|
|
mIsNewRow = false;
|
|
|
|
mColIndex++;
|
|
if (mColIndex > mDamageArea.EndCol()) {
|
|
mRowIndex++;
|
|
if (mRowIndex == mDamageArea.EndRow()) {
|
|
mColIndex = mDamageArea.StartCol();
|
|
}
|
|
else if (mRowIndex < mDamageArea.EndRow()) {
|
|
if (mRowIndex <= mRgLastRowIndex) {
|
|
SetNewRow();
|
|
}
|
|
else {
|
|
SetNewRowGroup();
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
else {
|
|
mAtEnd = true;
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
if (!mAtEnd) {
|
|
SetNewData(mRowIndex, mColIndex);
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
// XXX if CalcVerCornerOffset and CalcHorCornerOffset remain similar, combine
|
|
// them
|
|
// XXX Update terminology from physical to logical
|
|
/** Compute the vertical offset of a vertical border segment
|
|
* @param aCornerOwnerSide - which side owns the corner
|
|
* @param aCornerSubWidth - how wide is the nonwinning side of the corner
|
|
* @param aHorWidth - how wide is the horizontal edge of the corner
|
|
* @param aIsStartOfSeg - does this corner start a new segment
|
|
* @param aIsBevel - is this corner beveled
|
|
* @return - offset in twips
|
|
*/
|
|
static nscoord
|
|
CalcVerCornerOffset(LogicalSide aCornerOwnerSide,
|
|
BCPixelSize aCornerSubWidth,
|
|
BCPixelSize aHorWidth,
|
|
bool aIsStartOfSeg,
|
|
bool aIsBevel)
|
|
{
|
|
nscoord offset = 0;
|
|
// XXX These should be replaced with appropriate side-specific macros (which?)
|
|
BCPixelSize smallHalf, largeHalf;
|
|
if (IsBlock(aCornerOwnerSide)) {
|
|
DivideBCBorderSize(aCornerSubWidth, smallHalf, largeHalf);
|
|
if (aIsBevel) {
|
|
offset = (aIsStartOfSeg) ? -largeHalf : smallHalf;
|
|
}
|
|
else {
|
|
offset = (eLogicalSideBStart == aCornerOwnerSide) ? smallHalf : -largeHalf;
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
else {
|
|
DivideBCBorderSize(aHorWidth, smallHalf, largeHalf);
|
|
if (aIsBevel) {
|
|
offset = (aIsStartOfSeg) ? -largeHalf : smallHalf;
|
|
}
|
|
else {
|
|
offset = (aIsStartOfSeg) ? smallHalf : -largeHalf;
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
return nsPresContext::CSSPixelsToAppUnits(offset);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/** Compute the horizontal offset of a horizontal border segment
|
|
* @param aCornerOwnerSide - which side owns the corner
|
|
* @param aCornerSubWidth - how wide is the nonwinning side of the corner
|
|
* @param aVerWidth - how wide is the vertical edge of the corner
|
|
* @param aIsStartOfSeg - does this corner start a new segment
|
|
* @param aIsBevel - is this corner beveled
|
|
* @return - offset in twips
|
|
*/
|
|
static nscoord
|
|
CalcHorCornerOffset(LogicalSide aCornerOwnerSide,
|
|
BCPixelSize aCornerSubWidth,
|
|
BCPixelSize aVerWidth,
|
|
bool aIsStartOfSeg,
|
|
bool aIsBevel)
|
|
{
|
|
nscoord offset = 0;
|
|
// XXX These should be replaced with appropriate side-specific macros (which?)
|
|
BCPixelSize smallHalf, largeHalf;
|
|
if (IsInline(aCornerOwnerSide)) {
|
|
DivideBCBorderSize(aCornerSubWidth, smallHalf, largeHalf);
|
|
if (aIsBevel) {
|
|
offset = (aIsStartOfSeg) ? -largeHalf : smallHalf;
|
|
}
|
|
else {
|
|
offset = (eLogicalSideIStart == aCornerOwnerSide) ? smallHalf : -largeHalf;
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
else {
|
|
DivideBCBorderSize(aVerWidth, smallHalf, largeHalf);
|
|
if (aIsBevel) {
|
|
offset = (aIsStartOfSeg) ? -largeHalf : smallHalf;
|
|
}
|
|
else {
|
|
offset = (aIsStartOfSeg) ? smallHalf : -largeHalf;
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
return nsPresContext::CSSPixelsToAppUnits(offset);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
BCBlockDirSeg::BCBlockDirSeg()
|
|
{
|
|
mCol = nullptr;
|
|
mFirstCell = mLastCell = mAjaCell = nullptr;
|
|
mOffsetI = mOffsetB = mLength = mWidth = mBStartBevelOffset = 0;
|
|
mBStartBevelSide = eLogicalSideBStart;
|
|
mOwner = eCellOwner;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* Start a new block-direction segment
|
|
* @param aIter - iterator containing the structural information
|
|
* @param aBorderOwner - determines the border style
|
|
* @param aBlockSegISize - the width of segment in pixel
|
|
* @param aInlineSegBSize - the width of the inline-dir segment joining the corner
|
|
* at the start
|
|
*/
|
|
void
|
|
BCBlockDirSeg::Start(BCPaintBorderIterator& aIter,
|
|
BCBorderOwner aBorderOwner,
|
|
BCPixelSize aBlockSegISize,
|
|
BCPixelSize aInlineSegBSize)
|
|
{
|
|
LogicalSide ownerSide = eLogicalSideBStart;
|
|
bool bevel = false;
|
|
|
|
nscoord cornerSubWidth = (aIter.mBCData) ?
|
|
aIter.mBCData->GetCorner(ownerSide, bevel) : 0;
|
|
|
|
bool bStartBevel = (aBlockSegISize > 0) ? bevel : false;
|
|
BCPixelSize maxInlineSegBSize = std::max(aIter.mPrevInlineSegBSize, aInlineSegBSize);
|
|
nscoord offset = CalcVerCornerOffset(ownerSide, cornerSubWidth,
|
|
maxInlineSegBSize, true,
|
|
bStartBevel);
|
|
|
|
mBStartBevelOffset = bStartBevel ?
|
|
nsPresContext::CSSPixelsToAppUnits(maxInlineSegBSize): 0;
|
|
// XXX this assumes that only corners where 2 segments join can be beveled
|
|
mBStartBevelSide = (aInlineSegBSize > 0) ? eLogicalSideIEnd : eLogicalSideIStart;
|
|
mOffsetB += offset;
|
|
mLength = -offset;
|
|
mWidth = aBlockSegISize;
|
|
mOwner = aBorderOwner;
|
|
mFirstCell = aIter.mCell;
|
|
mFirstRowGroup = aIter.mRg;
|
|
mFirstRow = aIter.mRow;
|
|
if (aIter.GetRelativeColIndex() > 0) {
|
|
mAjaCell = aIter.mBlockDirInfo[aIter.GetRelativeColIndex() - 1].mLastCell;
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* Initialize the block-dir segments with information that will persist for any
|
|
* block-dir segment in this column
|
|
* @param aIter - iterator containing the structural information
|
|
*/
|
|
void
|
|
BCBlockDirSeg::Initialize(BCPaintBorderIterator& aIter)
|
|
{
|
|
int32_t relColIndex = aIter.GetRelativeColIndex();
|
|
mCol = aIter.IsTableIEndMost() ? aIter.mBlockDirInfo[relColIndex - 1].mCol :
|
|
aIter.mTableFirstInFlow->GetColFrame(aIter.mColIndex);
|
|
if (!mCol) ABORT0();
|
|
if (0 == relColIndex) {
|
|
mOffsetI = aIter.mInitialOffsetI;
|
|
}
|
|
// set mOffsetI for the next column
|
|
if (!aIter.IsDamageAreaIEndMost()) {
|
|
aIter.mBlockDirInfo[relColIndex + 1].mOffsetI =
|
|
mOffsetI + mCol->ISize(aIter.mTableWM);
|
|
}
|
|
mOffsetB = aIter.mInitialOffsetB;
|
|
mLastCell = aIter.mCell;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* Compute the offsets for the bEnd corner of a block-dir segment
|
|
* @param aIter - iterator containing the structural information
|
|
* @param aInlineSegBSize - the width of the inline-dir segment joining the corner
|
|
* at the start
|
|
*/
|
|
void
|
|
BCBlockDirSeg::GetBEndCorner(BCPaintBorderIterator& aIter,
|
|
BCPixelSize aInlineSegBSize)
|
|
{
|
|
LogicalSide ownerSide = eLogicalSideBStart;
|
|
nscoord cornerSubWidth = 0;
|
|
bool bevel = false;
|
|
if (aIter.mBCData) {
|
|
cornerSubWidth = aIter.mBCData->GetCorner(ownerSide, bevel);
|
|
}
|
|
mIsBEndBevel = (mWidth > 0) ? bevel : false;
|
|
mBEndInlineSegBSize = std::max(aIter.mPrevInlineSegBSize, aInlineSegBSize);
|
|
mBEndOffset = CalcVerCornerOffset(ownerSide, cornerSubWidth,
|
|
mBEndInlineSegBSize,
|
|
false, mIsBEndBevel);
|
|
mLength += mBEndOffset;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* Paint the block-dir segment
|
|
* @param aIter - iterator containing the structural information
|
|
* @param aRenderingContext - the rendering context
|
|
* @param aInlineSegBSize - the width of the inline-dir segment joining the corner
|
|
* at the start
|
|
*/
|
|
void
|
|
BCBlockDirSeg::Paint(BCPaintBorderIterator& aIter,
|
|
nsRenderingContext& aRenderingContext,
|
|
BCPixelSize aInlineSegBSize)
|
|
{
|
|
// get the border style, color and paint the segment
|
|
LogicalSide side =
|
|
aIter.IsDamageAreaIEndMost() ? eLogicalSideIEnd : eLogicalSideIStart;
|
|
int32_t relColIndex = aIter.GetRelativeColIndex();
|
|
nsTableColFrame* col = mCol; if (!col) ABORT0();
|
|
nsTableCellFrame* cell = mFirstCell; // ???
|
|
nsIFrame* owner = nullptr;
|
|
uint8_t style = NS_STYLE_BORDER_STYLE_SOLID;
|
|
nscolor color = 0xFFFFFFFF;
|
|
|
|
// All the tables frames have the same presContext, so we just use any one
|
|
// that exists here:
|
|
int32_t appUnitsPerDevPixel = col->PresContext()->AppUnitsPerDevPixel();
|
|
|
|
switch (mOwner) {
|
|
case eTableOwner:
|
|
owner = aIter.mTable;
|
|
break;
|
|
case eAjaColGroupOwner:
|
|
side = eLogicalSideIEnd;
|
|
if (!aIter.IsTableIEndMost() && (relColIndex > 0)) {
|
|
col = aIter.mBlockDirInfo[relColIndex - 1].mCol;
|
|
} // and fall through
|
|
case eColGroupOwner:
|
|
if (col) {
|
|
owner = col->GetParent();
|
|
}
|
|
break;
|
|
case eAjaColOwner:
|
|
side = eLogicalSideIEnd;
|
|
if (!aIter.IsTableIEndMost() && (relColIndex > 0)) {
|
|
col = aIter.mBlockDirInfo[relColIndex - 1].mCol;
|
|
} // and fall through
|
|
case eColOwner:
|
|
owner = col;
|
|
break;
|
|
case eAjaRowGroupOwner:
|
|
NS_ERROR("a neighboring rowgroup can never own a vertical border");
|
|
// and fall through
|
|
case eRowGroupOwner:
|
|
NS_ASSERTION(aIter.IsTableIStartMost() || aIter.IsTableIEndMost(),
|
|
"row group can own border only at table edge");
|
|
owner = mFirstRowGroup;
|
|
break;
|
|
case eAjaRowOwner:
|
|
NS_ERROR("program error"); // and fall through
|
|
case eRowOwner:
|
|
NS_ASSERTION(aIter.IsTableIStartMost() || aIter.IsTableIEndMost(),
|
|
"row can own border only at table edge");
|
|
owner = mFirstRow;
|
|
break;
|
|
case eAjaCellOwner:
|
|
side = eLogicalSideIEnd;
|
|
cell = mAjaCell; // and fall through
|
|
case eCellOwner:
|
|
owner = cell;
|
|
break;
|
|
}
|
|
if (owner) {
|
|
::GetPaintStyleInfo(owner, aIter.mTableWM, side, &style, &color);
|
|
}
|
|
BCPixelSize smallHalf, largeHalf;
|
|
DivideBCBorderSize(mWidth, smallHalf, largeHalf);
|
|
LogicalRect segRect(aIter.mTableWM,
|
|
mOffsetI - nsPresContext::CSSPixelsToAppUnits(largeHalf),
|
|
mOffsetB,
|
|
nsPresContext::CSSPixelsToAppUnits(mWidth), mLength);
|
|
nscoord bEndBevelOffset = (mIsBEndBevel) ?
|
|
nsPresContext::CSSPixelsToAppUnits(mBEndInlineSegBSize) : 0;
|
|
LogicalSide bEndBevelSide =
|
|
(aInlineSegBSize > 0) ? eLogicalSideIEnd : eLogicalSideIStart;
|
|
|
|
// Convert logical to physical sides/coordinates for DrawTableBorderSegment.
|
|
|
|
nsRect physicalRect = segRect.GetPhysicalRect(aIter.mTableWM,
|
|
aIter.mTable->GetSize());
|
|
// XXX For reversed vertical writing-modes (with direction:rtl), we need to
|
|
// invert physicalRect's y-position here, with respect to the table.
|
|
// However, it's not worth fixing the border positions here until the
|
|
// ordering of the table columns themselves is also fixed (bug 1180528).
|
|
|
|
uint8_t startBevelSide = aIter.mTableWM.PhysicalSide(mBStartBevelSide);
|
|
uint8_t endBevelSide = aIter.mTableWM.PhysicalSide(bEndBevelSide);
|
|
nscoord startBevelOffset = mBStartBevelOffset;
|
|
nscoord endBevelOffset = bEndBevelOffset;
|
|
// In vertical-rl mode, the 'start' and 'end' of the block-dir (horizontal)
|
|
// border segment need to be swapped because DrawTableBorderSegment will
|
|
// apply the 'start' bevel at the left edge, and 'end' at the right.
|
|
// (Note: In this case, startBevelSide/endBevelSide will usually both be
|
|
// "top" or "bottom". DrawTableBorderSegment works purely with physical
|
|
// coordinates, so it expects startBevelOffset to be the indentation-from-
|
|
// the-left for the "start" (left) end of the border-segment, and
|
|
// endBevelOffset is the indentation-from-the-right for the "end" (right)
|
|
// end of the border-segment. We've got them reversed, since our block dir
|
|
// is RTL, so we have to swap them here.)
|
|
if (aIter.mTableWM.IsVerticalRL()) {
|
|
Swap(startBevelSide, endBevelSide);
|
|
Swap(startBevelOffset, endBevelOffset);
|
|
}
|
|
nsCSSRendering::DrawTableBorderSegment(aRenderingContext, style, color,
|
|
aIter.mTableBgColor, physicalRect,
|
|
appUnitsPerDevPixel,
|
|
nsPresContext::AppUnitsPerCSSPixel(),
|
|
startBevelSide, startBevelOffset,
|
|
endBevelSide, endBevelOffset);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* Advance the start point of a segment
|
|
*/
|
|
void
|
|
BCBlockDirSeg::AdvanceOffsetB()
|
|
{
|
|
mOffsetB += mLength - mBEndOffset;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* Accumulate the current segment
|
|
*/
|
|
void
|
|
BCBlockDirSeg::IncludeCurrentBorder(BCPaintBorderIterator& aIter)
|
|
{
|
|
mLastCell = aIter.mCell;
|
|
mLength += aIter.mRow->BSize(aIter.mTableWM);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
BCInlineDirSeg::BCInlineDirSeg()
|
|
{
|
|
mOffsetI = mOffsetB = mLength = mWidth = mIStartBevelOffset = 0;
|
|
mIStartBevelSide = eLogicalSideBStart;
|
|
mFirstCell = mAjaCell = nullptr;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/** Initialize an inline-dir border segment for painting
|
|
* @param aIter - iterator storing the current and adjacent frames
|
|
* @param aBorderOwner - which frame owns the border
|
|
* @param aBEndBlockSegISize - block-dir segment width coming from up
|
|
* @param aInlineSegBSize - the thickness of the segment
|
|
+ */
|
|
void
|
|
BCInlineDirSeg::Start(BCPaintBorderIterator& aIter,
|
|
BCBorderOwner aBorderOwner,
|
|
BCPixelSize aBEndBlockSegISize,
|
|
BCPixelSize aInlineSegBSize)
|
|
{
|
|
LogicalSide cornerOwnerSide = eLogicalSideBStart;
|
|
bool bevel = false;
|
|
|
|
mOwner = aBorderOwner;
|
|
nscoord cornerSubWidth = (aIter.mBCData) ?
|
|
aIter.mBCData->GetCorner(cornerOwnerSide,
|
|
bevel) : 0;
|
|
|
|
bool iStartBevel = (aInlineSegBSize > 0) ? bevel : false;
|
|
int32_t relColIndex = aIter.GetRelativeColIndex();
|
|
nscoord maxBlockSegISize = std::max(aIter.mBlockDirInfo[relColIndex].mWidth,
|
|
aBEndBlockSegISize);
|
|
nscoord offset = CalcHorCornerOffset(cornerOwnerSide, cornerSubWidth,
|
|
maxBlockSegISize, true, iStartBevel);
|
|
mIStartBevelOffset = (iStartBevel && (aInlineSegBSize > 0)) ? maxBlockSegISize : 0;
|
|
// XXX this assumes that only corners where 2 segments join can be beveled
|
|
mIStartBevelSide = (aBEndBlockSegISize > 0) ? eLogicalSideBEnd : eLogicalSideBStart;
|
|
mOffsetI += offset;
|
|
mLength = -offset;
|
|
mWidth = aInlineSegBSize;
|
|
mFirstCell = aIter.mCell;
|
|
mAjaCell = (aIter.IsDamageAreaBStartMost()) ? nullptr :
|
|
aIter.mBlockDirInfo[relColIndex].mLastCell;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* Compute the offsets for the iEnd corner of an inline-dir segment
|
|
* @param aIter - iterator containing the structural information
|
|
* @param aIStartSegISize - the iSize of the block-dir segment joining the corner
|
|
* at the start
|
|
*/
|
|
void
|
|
BCInlineDirSeg::GetIEndCorner(BCPaintBorderIterator& aIter,
|
|
BCPixelSize aIStartSegISize)
|
|
{
|
|
LogicalSide ownerSide = eLogicalSideBStart;
|
|
nscoord cornerSubWidth = 0;
|
|
bool bevel = false;
|
|
if (aIter.mBCData) {
|
|
cornerSubWidth = aIter.mBCData->GetCorner(ownerSide, bevel);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
mIsIEndBevel = (mWidth > 0) ? bevel : 0;
|
|
int32_t relColIndex = aIter.GetRelativeColIndex();
|
|
nscoord verWidth = std::max(aIter.mBlockDirInfo[relColIndex].mWidth,
|
|
aIStartSegISize);
|
|
mEndOffset = CalcHorCornerOffset(ownerSide, cornerSubWidth, verWidth,
|
|
false, mIsIEndBevel);
|
|
mLength += mEndOffset;
|
|
mIEndBevelOffset = (mIsIEndBevel) ?
|
|
nsPresContext::CSSPixelsToAppUnits(verWidth) : 0;
|
|
mIEndBevelSide = (aIStartSegISize > 0) ? eLogicalSideBEnd : eLogicalSideBStart;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* Paint the inline-dir segment
|
|
* @param aIter - iterator containing the structural information
|
|
* @param aRenderingContext - the rendering context
|
|
*/
|
|
void
|
|
BCInlineDirSeg::Paint(BCPaintBorderIterator& aIter,
|
|
nsRenderingContext& aRenderingContext)
|
|
{
|
|
// get the border style, color and paint the segment
|
|
LogicalSide side =
|
|
aIter.IsDamageAreaBEndMost() ? eLogicalSideBEnd : eLogicalSideBStart;
|
|
nsIFrame* rg = aIter.mRg; if (!rg) ABORT0();
|
|
nsIFrame* row = aIter.mRow; if (!row) ABORT0();
|
|
nsIFrame* cell = mFirstCell;
|
|
nsIFrame* col;
|
|
nsIFrame* owner = nullptr;
|
|
|
|
// All the tables frames have the same presContext, so we just use any one
|
|
// that exists here:
|
|
int32_t appUnitsPerDevPixel = row->PresContext()->AppUnitsPerDevPixel();
|
|
|
|
uint8_t style = NS_STYLE_BORDER_STYLE_SOLID;
|
|
nscolor color = 0xFFFFFFFF;
|
|
|
|
switch (mOwner) {
|
|
case eTableOwner:
|
|
owner = aIter.mTable;
|
|
break;
|
|
case eAjaColGroupOwner:
|
|
NS_ERROR("neighboring colgroups can never own an inline-dir border");
|
|
// and fall through
|
|
case eColGroupOwner:
|
|
NS_ASSERTION(aIter.IsTableBStartMost() || aIter.IsTableBEndMost(),
|
|
"col group can own border only at the table edge");
|
|
col = aIter.mTableFirstInFlow->GetColFrame(aIter.mColIndex - 1);
|
|
if (!col) ABORT0();
|
|
owner = col->GetParent();
|
|
break;
|
|
case eAjaColOwner:
|
|
NS_ERROR("neighboring column can never own an inline-dir border");
|
|
// and fall through
|
|
case eColOwner:
|
|
NS_ASSERTION(aIter.IsTableBStartMost() || aIter.IsTableBEndMost(),
|
|
"col can own border only at the table edge");
|
|
owner = aIter.mTableFirstInFlow->GetColFrame(aIter.mColIndex - 1);
|
|
break;
|
|
case eAjaRowGroupOwner:
|
|
side = eLogicalSideBEnd;
|
|
rg = (aIter.IsTableBEndMost()) ? aIter.mRg : aIter.mPrevRg;
|
|
// and fall through
|
|
case eRowGroupOwner:
|
|
owner = rg;
|
|
break;
|
|
case eAjaRowOwner:
|
|
side = eLogicalSideBEnd;
|
|
row = (aIter.IsTableBEndMost()) ? aIter.mRow : aIter.mPrevRow;
|
|
// and fall through
|
|
case eRowOwner:
|
|
owner = row;
|
|
break;
|
|
case eAjaCellOwner:
|
|
side = eLogicalSideBEnd;
|
|
// if this is null due to the damage area origin-y > 0, then the border
|
|
// won't show up anyway
|
|
cell = mAjaCell;
|
|
// and fall through
|
|
case eCellOwner:
|
|
owner = cell;
|
|
break;
|
|
}
|
|
if (owner) {
|
|
::GetPaintStyleInfo(owner, aIter.mTableWM, side, &style, &color);
|
|
}
|
|
BCPixelSize smallHalf, largeHalf;
|
|
DivideBCBorderSize(mWidth, smallHalf, largeHalf);
|
|
LogicalRect segRect(aIter.mTableWM, mOffsetI,
|
|
mOffsetB - nsPresContext::CSSPixelsToAppUnits(largeHalf),
|
|
mLength,
|
|
nsPresContext::CSSPixelsToAppUnits(mWidth));
|
|
|
|
// Convert logical to physical sides/coordinates for DrawTableBorderSegment.
|
|
nsRect physicalRect = segRect.GetPhysicalRect(aIter.mTableWM,
|
|
aIter.mTable->GetSize());
|
|
uint8_t startBevelSide = aIter.mTableWM.PhysicalSide(mIStartBevelSide);
|
|
uint8_t endBevelSide = aIter.mTableWM.PhysicalSide(mIEndBevelSide);
|
|
nscoord startBevelOffset =
|
|
nsPresContext::CSSPixelsToAppUnits(mIStartBevelOffset);
|
|
nscoord endBevelOffset = mIEndBevelOffset;
|
|
// With inline-RTL directionality, the 'start' and 'end' of the inline-dir
|
|
// border segment need to be swapped because DrawTableBorderSegment will
|
|
// apply the 'start' bevel physically at the left or top edge, and 'end' at
|
|
// the right or bottom.
|
|
// (Note: startBevelSide/endBevelSide will be "top" or "bottom" in horizontal
|
|
// writing mode, or "left" or "right" in vertical mode.
|
|
// DrawTableBorderSegment works purely with physical coordinates, so it
|
|
// expects startBevelOffset to be the indentation-from-the-left or top end
|
|
// of the border-segment, and endBevelOffset is the indentation-from-the-
|
|
// right or bottom end. If the writing mode is inline-RTL, our "start" and
|
|
// "end" will be reversed from this physical-coord view, so we have to swap
|
|
// them here.
|
|
if (!aIter.mTableWM.IsBidiLTR()) {
|
|
Swap(startBevelSide, endBevelSide);
|
|
Swap(startBevelOffset, endBevelOffset);
|
|
}
|
|
nsCSSRendering::DrawTableBorderSegment(aRenderingContext, style, color,
|
|
aIter.mTableBgColor, physicalRect,
|
|
appUnitsPerDevPixel,
|
|
nsPresContext::AppUnitsPerCSSPixel(),
|
|
startBevelSide, startBevelOffset,
|
|
endBevelSide, endBevelOffset);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* Advance the start point of a segment
|
|
*/
|
|
void
|
|
BCInlineDirSeg::AdvanceOffsetI()
|
|
{
|
|
mOffsetI += (mLength - mEndOffset);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* Accumulate the current segment
|
|
*/
|
|
void
|
|
BCInlineDirSeg::IncludeCurrentBorder(BCPaintBorderIterator& aIter)
|
|
{
|
|
mLength += aIter.mBlockDirInfo[aIter.GetRelativeColIndex()].mColWidth;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* store the column width information while painting inline-dir segment
|
|
*/
|
|
void
|
|
BCPaintBorderIterator::StoreColumnWidth(int32_t aIndex)
|
|
{
|
|
if (IsTableIEndMost()) {
|
|
mBlockDirInfo[aIndex].mColWidth = mBlockDirInfo[aIndex - 1].mColWidth;
|
|
}
|
|
else {
|
|
nsTableColFrame* col = mTableFirstInFlow->GetColFrame(mColIndex);
|
|
if (!col) ABORT0();
|
|
mBlockDirInfo[aIndex].mColWidth = col->ISize(mTableWM);
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
/**
|
|
* Determine if a block-dir segment owns the corner
|
|
*/
|
|
bool
|
|
BCPaintBorderIterator::BlockDirSegmentOwnsCorner()
|
|
{
|
|
LogicalSide cornerOwnerSide = eLogicalSideBStart;
|
|
bool bevel = false;
|
|
if (mBCData) {
|
|
mBCData->GetCorner(cornerOwnerSide, bevel);
|
|
}
|
|
// unitialized ownerside, bevel
|
|
return (eLogicalSideBStart == cornerOwnerSide) ||
|
|
(eLogicalSideBEnd == cornerOwnerSide);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* Paint if necessary an inline-dir segment, otherwise accumulate it
|
|
* @param aRenderingContext - the rendering context
|
|
*/
|
|
void
|
|
BCPaintBorderIterator::AccumulateOrPaintInlineDirSegment(nsRenderingContext& aRenderingContext)
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
int32_t relColIndex = GetRelativeColIndex();
|
|
// store the current col width if it hasn't been already
|
|
if (mBlockDirInfo[relColIndex].mColWidth < 0) {
|
|
StoreColumnWidth(relColIndex);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
BCBorderOwner borderOwner = eCellOwner;
|
|
BCBorderOwner ignoreBorderOwner;
|
|
bool isSegStart = true;
|
|
bool ignoreSegStart;
|
|
|
|
nscoord iStartSegISize =
|
|
mBCData ? mBCData->GetIStartEdge(ignoreBorderOwner, ignoreSegStart) : 0;
|
|
nscoord bStartSegBSize =
|
|
mBCData ? mBCData->GetBStartEdge(borderOwner, isSegStart) : 0;
|
|
|
|
if (mIsNewRow || (IsDamageAreaIStartMost() && IsDamageAreaBEndMost())) {
|
|
// reset for every new row and on the bottom of the last row
|
|
mInlineSeg.mOffsetB = mNextOffsetB;
|
|
mNextOffsetB = mNextOffsetB + mRow->BSize(mTableWM);
|
|
mInlineSeg.mOffsetI = mInitialOffsetI;
|
|
mInlineSeg.Start(*this, borderOwner, iStartSegISize, bStartSegBSize);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
if (!IsDamageAreaIStartMost() && (isSegStart || IsDamageAreaIEndMost() ||
|
|
BlockDirSegmentOwnsCorner())) {
|
|
// paint the previous seg or the current one if IsDamageAreaIEndMost()
|
|
if (mInlineSeg.mLength > 0) {
|
|
mInlineSeg.GetIEndCorner(*this, iStartSegISize);
|
|
if (mInlineSeg.mWidth > 0) {
|
|
mInlineSeg.Paint(*this, aRenderingContext);
|
|
}
|
|
mInlineSeg.AdvanceOffsetI();
|
|
}
|
|
mInlineSeg.Start(*this, borderOwner, iStartSegISize, bStartSegBSize);
|
|
}
|
|
mInlineSeg.IncludeCurrentBorder(*this);
|
|
mBlockDirInfo[relColIndex].mWidth = iStartSegISize;
|
|
mBlockDirInfo[relColIndex].mLastCell = mCell;
|
|
}
|
|
/**
|
|
* Paint if necessary a block-dir segment, otherwise accumulate it
|
|
* @param aRenderingContext - the rendering context
|
|
*/
|
|
void
|
|
BCPaintBorderIterator::AccumulateOrPaintBlockDirSegment(nsRenderingContext& aRenderingContext)
|
|
{
|
|
BCBorderOwner borderOwner = eCellOwner;
|
|
BCBorderOwner ignoreBorderOwner;
|
|
bool isSegStart = true;
|
|
bool ignoreSegStart;
|
|
|
|
nscoord blockSegISize =
|
|
mBCData ? mBCData->GetIStartEdge(borderOwner, isSegStart) : 0;
|
|
nscoord inlineSegBSize =
|
|
mBCData ? mBCData->GetBStartEdge(ignoreBorderOwner, ignoreSegStart) : 0;
|
|
|
|
int32_t relColIndex = GetRelativeColIndex();
|
|
BCBlockDirSeg& blockDirSeg = mBlockDirInfo[relColIndex];
|
|
if (!blockDirSeg.mCol) { // on the first damaged row and the first segment in the
|
|
// col
|
|
blockDirSeg.Initialize(*this);
|
|
blockDirSeg.Start(*this, borderOwner, blockSegISize, inlineSegBSize);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
if (!IsDamageAreaBStartMost() && (isSegStart || IsDamageAreaBEndMost() ||
|
|
IsAfterRepeatedHeader() ||
|
|
StartRepeatedFooter())) {
|
|
// paint the previous seg or the current one if IsDamageAreaBEndMost()
|
|
if (blockDirSeg.mLength > 0) {
|
|
blockDirSeg.GetBEndCorner(*this, inlineSegBSize);
|
|
if (blockDirSeg.mWidth > 0) {
|
|
blockDirSeg.Paint(*this, aRenderingContext, inlineSegBSize);
|
|
}
|
|
blockDirSeg.AdvanceOffsetB();
|
|
}
|
|
blockDirSeg.Start(*this, borderOwner, blockSegISize, inlineSegBSize);
|
|
}
|
|
blockDirSeg.IncludeCurrentBorder(*this);
|
|
mPrevInlineSegBSize = inlineSegBSize;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* Reset the block-dir information cache
|
|
*/
|
|
void
|
|
BCPaintBorderIterator::ResetVerInfo()
|
|
{
|
|
if (mBlockDirInfo) {
|
|
memset(mBlockDirInfo, 0, mDamageArea.ColCount() * sizeof(BCBlockDirSeg));
|
|
// XXX reinitialize properly
|
|
for (auto xIndex : MakeRange(mDamageArea.ColCount())) {
|
|
mBlockDirInfo[xIndex].mColWidth = -1;
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/**
|
|
* Method to paint BCBorders, this does not use currently display lists although
|
|
* it will do this in future
|
|
* @param aRenderingContext - the rendering context
|
|
* @param aDirtyRect - inside this rectangle the BC Borders will redrawn
|
|
*/
|
|
void
|
|
nsTableFrame::PaintBCBorders(nsRenderingContext& aRenderingContext,
|
|
const nsRect& aDirtyRect)
|
|
{
|
|
// We first transfer the aDirtyRect into cellmap coordinates to compute which
|
|
// cell borders need to be painted
|
|
BCPaintBorderIterator iter(this);
|
|
if (!iter.SetDamageArea(aDirtyRect))
|
|
return;
|
|
|
|
// XXX comment still has physical terminology
|
|
// First, paint all of the vertical borders from top to bottom and left to
|
|
// right as they become complete. They are painted first, since they are less
|
|
// efficient to paint than horizontal segments. They were stored with as few
|
|
// segments as possible (since horizontal borders are painted last and
|
|
// possibly over them). For every cell in a row that fails in the damage are
|
|
// we look up if the current border would start a new segment, if so we paint
|
|
// the previously stored vertical segment and start a new segment. After
|
|
// this we the now active segment with the current border. These
|
|
// segments are stored in mBlockDirInfo to be used on the next row
|
|
for (iter.First(); !iter.mAtEnd; iter.Next()) {
|
|
iter.AccumulateOrPaintBlockDirSegment(aRenderingContext);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
// Next, paint all of the inline-dir border segments from bStart to bEnd reuse
|
|
// the mBlockDirInfo array to keep track of col widths and block-dir segments for
|
|
// corner calculations
|
|
iter.Reset();
|
|
for (iter.First(); !iter.mAtEnd; iter.Next()) {
|
|
iter.AccumulateOrPaintInlineDirSegment(aRenderingContext);
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
bool
|
|
nsTableFrame::RowHasSpanningCells(int32_t aRowIndex, int32_t aNumEffCols)
|
|
{
|
|
bool result = false;
|
|
nsTableCellMap* cellMap = GetCellMap();
|
|
NS_PRECONDITION (cellMap, "bad call, cellMap not yet allocated.");
|
|
if (cellMap) {
|
|
result = cellMap->RowHasSpanningCells(aRowIndex, aNumEffCols);
|
|
}
|
|
return result;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
bool
|
|
nsTableFrame::RowIsSpannedInto(int32_t aRowIndex, int32_t aNumEffCols)
|
|
{
|
|
bool result = false;
|
|
nsTableCellMap* cellMap = GetCellMap();
|
|
NS_PRECONDITION (cellMap, "bad call, cellMap not yet allocated.");
|
|
if (cellMap) {
|
|
result = cellMap->RowIsSpannedInto(aRowIndex, aNumEffCols);
|
|
}
|
|
return result;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/* static */
|
|
void
|
|
nsTableFrame::InvalidateTableFrame(nsIFrame* aFrame,
|
|
const nsRect& aOrigRect,
|
|
const nsRect& aOrigVisualOverflow,
|
|
bool aIsFirstReflow)
|
|
{
|
|
nsIFrame* parent = aFrame->GetParent();
|
|
NS_ASSERTION(parent, "What happened here?");
|
|
|
|
if (parent->HasAnyStateBits(NS_FRAME_FIRST_REFLOW)) {
|
|
// Don't bother; we'll invalidate the parent's overflow rect when
|
|
// we finish reflowing it.
|
|
return;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
// The part that looks at both the rect and the overflow rect is a
|
|
// bit of a hack. See nsBlockFrame::ReflowLine for an eloquent
|
|
// description of its hackishness.
|
|
//
|
|
// This doesn't really make sense now that we have DLBI.
|
|
// This code can probably be simplified a fair bit.
|
|
nsRect visualOverflow = aFrame->GetVisualOverflowRect();
|
|
if (aIsFirstReflow ||
|
|
aOrigRect.TopLeft() != aFrame->GetPosition() ||
|
|
aOrigVisualOverflow.TopLeft() != visualOverflow.TopLeft()) {
|
|
// Invalidate the old and new overflow rects. Note that if the
|
|
// frame moved, we can't just use aOrigVisualOverflow, since it's in
|
|
// coordinates relative to the old position. So invalidate via
|
|
// aFrame's parent, and reposition that overflow rect to the right
|
|
// place.
|
|
// XXXbz this doesn't handle outlines, does it?
|
|
aFrame->InvalidateFrame();
|
|
parent->InvalidateFrameWithRect(aOrigVisualOverflow + aOrigRect.TopLeft());
|
|
} else if (aOrigRect.Size() != aFrame->GetSize() ||
|
|
aOrigVisualOverflow.Size() != visualOverflow.Size()){
|
|
aFrame->InvalidateFrameWithRect(aOrigVisualOverflow);
|
|
aFrame->InvalidateFrame();
|
|
parent->InvalidateFrameWithRect(aOrigRect);;
|
|
parent->InvalidateFrame();
|
|
}
|
|
}
|